2018 Flex

User Manual: Pdf 2018-flex

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 508

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018 FLEX Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com

ford.ca

February 2018
Second Printing
Owner’s Manual
Flex
Litho in U.S.A.

JA8J 19A321 AA

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201801 20180105201236

Table of Contents
Introduction

Supplementary Restraints
System

About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9
California Proposition 65 .............................11
Perchlorate ........................................................11
Ford Credit .........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................13
Export Unique Options .................................13

Principle of Operation .................................44
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46
Side Airbags ....................................................48
Safety Canopy™ ...........................................49
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......50
Airbag Disposal ...............................................51

Keys and Remote Controls

Protecting the Environment .......................15

General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................52
Remote Control .............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................56

At a Glance

MyKey™

Instrument Panel Overview .......................16

Principle of Operation ..................................57
Creating a MyKey ..........................................58
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................59
Checking MyKey System Status .............60
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems .........................................................61
MyKey Troubleshooting ...............................61

Environment

Child Safety
General Information ......................................18
Installing Child Restraints ...........................19
Booster Seats .................................................29
Child Restraint Positioning .........................31
Child Safety Locks .........................................32

Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................63
Keyless Entry ..................................................66

Seatbelts
Principle of Operation .................................34
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................35
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................38
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................39
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................39
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ................................................41
Seatbelt Extension ........................................41

Liftgate
Manual Liftgate .............................................69
Power Liftgate ................................................70

Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................73
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................74

Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .........................43

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Steering Wheel

Instrument Cluster

Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................75
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................76
Audio Control ..................................................76
Voice Control ...................................................77
Cruise Control ..................................................77
Information Display Control .......................77
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................77

Gauges ..............................................................92
Warning Lamps and Indicators ................93
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............96

Information Displays
General Information .....................................97
Information Messages ...............................105

Climate Control

Windshield Wipers .......................................80
Autowipers ......................................................80
Windshield Washers .....................................81
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ...........81

Manual Climate Control .............................114
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD ..................115
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System ......................116
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
..........................................................................118
Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........120
Heated Windows and Mirrors ...................121
Cabin Air Filter ...............................................122
Remote Start .................................................122

Lighting

Seats

General Information .....................................82
Lighting Control .............................................82
Autolamps .......................................................83
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................84
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................84
Daytime Running Lamps ...........................84
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................85
Direction Indicators ......................................85
Interior Lamps ................................................85
Ambient Lighting ..........................................86

Sitting in the Correct Position .................123
Head Restraints ............................................123
Manual Seats ................................................126
Power Seats ...................................................126
Memory Function ........................................128
Rear Seats ......................................................129
Heated Seats ................................................136
Climate Controlled Seats ..........................137

Windows and Mirrors

Universal Garage Door Opener ..............138

Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals ....................................79

Wipers and Washers

Universal Garage Door Opener

Power Windows .............................................87
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................88
Interior Mirror ..................................................90
Sun Visors ........................................................90
Moonroof .........................................................90

Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................143

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Storage Compartments

Stability Control

Center Console .............................................145
Overhead Console ......................................146

Principle of Operation ................................178
Using Stability Control ...............................179

Starting and Stopping the
Engine

Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................180
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................180
Active Park Assist .........................................181
Rear View Camera ......................................185

General Information ...................................147
Ignition Switch ..............................................147
Keyless Starting ............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine ......................148
Engine Block Heater ....................................151

Cruise Control
Principle of Operation ...............................189
Using Cruise Control ..................................189
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............190

Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................153
Fuel Quality ....................................................153
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................154
Running Out of Fuel ...................................154
Refueling .........................................................156
Fuel Consumption ......................................158

Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System .............196
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................198
Steering ...........................................................201
Collision Warning System ........................201

Engine Emission Control

Load Carrying

Emission Law ................................................160
Catalytic Converter ......................................161

Cargo Nets ....................................................204
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............204
Load Limit .....................................................204

Transmission
Automatic Transmission ..........................164

Towing

All-Wheel Drive

Towing a Trailer ............................................210
Trailer Sway Control .....................................211
Recommended Towing Weights .............211
Essential Towing Checks ..........................213
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......216

Using All-Wheel Drive ...............................168

Brakes
General Information ....................................175
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................176
Parking Brake .................................................176

Driving Hints
Breaking-In .....................................................218
Economical Driving .....................................218
Driving Through Water ...............................219
Floor Mats .......................................................219

Traction Control
Principle of Operation .................................177
Using Traction Control ................................177

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Brake Fluid Check .......................................256
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................257
Washer Fluid Check ....................................257
Changing the 12V Battery .........................257
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................259
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................259
Adjusting the Headlamps .......................260
Removing a Headlamp ..............................261
Changing a Bulb ...........................................261
Bulb Specification Chart .........................265
Changing the Engine Air Filter ................267

Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................221
Hazard Flashers ...........................................222
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................222
Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................223
Post-Crash Alert System .........................225
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................225

Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............227
In California (U.S. Only) ............................228
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................229
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................230
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................230
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
........................................................................232
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................232
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................232

Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................268
Cleaning Products ......................................268
Cleaning the Exterior .................................268
Waxing ............................................................270
Cleaning the Engine ...................................270
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................270
Cleaning the Interior ....................................271
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................271
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................272
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............273
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................273
Vehicle Storage ............................................273
Body Styling Kits .........................................275

Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart .........................234
Changing a Fuse ..........................................243

Maintenance
General Information ..................................245
Opening and Closing the Hood .............245
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec
........................................................................246
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................247
Engine Oil Dipstick .....................................249
Engine Oil Check .........................................249
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................250
Engine Coolant Check ..............................250
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................254

Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................276
Tire Care .........................................................278
Using Snow Chains ....................................292
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........293
Changing a Road Wheel ..........................296
Technical Specifications .........................300

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Table of Contents
Climate ...........................................................396
Phone .............................................................399
Navigation .....................................................404
Apps ..................................................................412
Settings ...........................................................415
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................430

Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Duratec
........................................................................302
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................302
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec ............303
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .....305
Vehicle Identification Number ..............306
Vehicle Certification Label ......................307
Transmission Code Designation ...........307
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec ......................................................308
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™ ................................................312

Accessories
Accessories ...................................................443

Ford Protect
Ford Protect .................................................445

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information .......447
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........450
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................453
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........455

Audio System
General Information ....................................317
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio ............................318
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD .........................................................323
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD .................................................................324
USB Port .........................................................325

Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............465
End User License Agreement .................467

SYNC™
General Information ..................................326
Using Voice Recognition ..........................328
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ............331
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......344
SYNC™ AppLink™ ....................................346
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................347
SYNC™ Troubleshooting .........................357

SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................365
Home Screen ................................................377
Using Voice Recognition ..........................379
Entertainment .............................................386

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E154903

Right-hand side.

Left-hand side.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Air conditioning system

Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.

E162384

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system

Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.

Battery

Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleum
based

This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
Brake system

Fasten seatbelt
E71880

Flammable
E231160

E270480

Cabin air filter

Front airbag
E67017

Check fuel cap

Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock

Fuel pump reset

Child seat lower anchor

Fuse compartment

Child seat tether anchor

Hazard flashers

Cruise control

Heated rear window

Do not open when hot

Windshield defrosting system

Engine air filter

Interior luggage compartment
release

Engine coolant

Jack

Engine coolant temperature

Keep out of reach of children

E71340

E161353

Engine oil

Lighting control

Explosive gas

Low tire pressure warning

Fan warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
Note operating instructions

Side airbag

Horn control

Shield the eyes

E270945
E167012

Panic alarm

Stability control
E138639

Windshield wiping system

Parking aid
E139213

E270969

Windshield wash and wipe

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording

Power windows front/rear

Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such
as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this

Power window lockout

Requires registered technician
E231159

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

See Service Manual
E231158

Service engine soon

Passenger airbag activated
E270849

Passenger airbag deactivated
E270850

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.

data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 326).

This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.

Event Data Recording

Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 326).

Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.

PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:

Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 326).

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.

vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.

Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.

Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Manual that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Manual.

Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.

Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During

NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT

WARNING

Do not connect wireless plug-in
devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.

Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.

Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
13

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Introduction
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address

www.sustainability.ford.com

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

E232260

Air vent.

Wiper lever. See Windshield
Wipers (page 80).

Hazard flasher switch. See
Hazard Flashers (page 222).

Direction Indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 85).

Information and entertainment
display.

Information display control. See
Information Display Control
(page 77).

Passenger airbag indicator light.
See Front Passenger Sensing
System (page 46).

Instrument cluster. See Gauges
(page 92).

Climate controls. See Climate
Control (page 114).

Information display control. See
Information Display Control
(page 77).

Keyless start button. See
Keyless Starting (page 147).

Audio control. See Audio
Control (page 76).

Audio system. See Audio
System (page 317).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Horn.

Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 76).

At a Glance
P

Cruise control switches. See
Using Cruise Control (page
189).

Hood release. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 245).

Instrument panel dimmer
control. See Instrument
Lighting Dimmer (page 84).

Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 82).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.

See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety

On hot days, the temperature inside
the vehicle can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child

Child size, height, weight, or age

Infants or
toddlers

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).

Small children

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).

Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
Larger children
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).

•

You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 46).

Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.

INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats

E142594

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Recommended restraint
type

Child Safety
•

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

•

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
•

WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

•

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.

Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.

Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.

Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.

When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child restraint fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
restraint fit. See Head Restraints
(page 123).
Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.

Child Safety
Standard seatbelts

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.

E142528

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E142529

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle provides extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142534

10.

We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.

E142533

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.

Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts

E142530

E142528

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E146523

E146522

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
7.

Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146524

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.

E146525

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once the extra weight
of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child restraint
to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight
lean toward the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
E142534

10.

The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seatback and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether
anchor behind that seating position.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap to the proper
top tether anchor if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.

WARNINGS
Do not attach two child safety
restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.

Second-row bucket seats and third-row
passenger side

E190825

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
Second-row bench seats and third-row
passenger side

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.

E190826

The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in
(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm)
center to center. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. You can only
use LATCH compatible child restraints
(with attachments on belt webbing) at
this seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child restraint is
attached to that anchor.

E144054

The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seatback below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.

Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.

Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats

Second row bench seats and third row
passenger side

When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.

Using Tether Straps

E190828

Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:

Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.

Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.

Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child safety seat using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Second row bucket seats and third row
passenger side

E190829

E190827

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
Placement of the tether strap
• Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback, under the head
restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If needed, remove the
head restraint to improve the fit of the
child safety seat or tether strap.
• Second row center seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, remove the head restraint to
improve the fit of the child safety seat
or tether strap. See Head Restraints
(page 123).
• Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the
seatback, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down
to improve the fit of the child safety
seat or tether strap. See Head
Restraints (page 123).

E190833

4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.

1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be
twisted ½ turn to improve installation.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,
the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
crash.

Second row bucket (40/40)

E190830

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
Second row bench (60/40)

E190831

Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.

Third row seat

Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).

E190832

Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.

Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:

BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Do not put the shoulder section of
the seatbelt or allow the child to put
the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E142595

•

•
•
•
•

Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?

E70710

•

Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.

Types of Booster Seats

Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.

E68924

•

Backless booster seats

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

High back booster seats

Child Safety

E142596

E142597

WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.

Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle

CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
31

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.

WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.

Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.

To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X

Restraint
Type

Combined
weight of
child and
child seat

LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)

LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)

Rear facing Up to 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)

Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt
and LATCH
only
and top
(lower
tether
anchors
anchor
and top
tether
anchor)

Rear facing Over 65 lb
child seat
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat

Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Forward
facing
child seat

Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
123).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Child Safety

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.

Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a
vehicle that is in the sunshine. The
hot seatbelts or seats may burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.

Children must always be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.

All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.

All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.

The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt
and rear inflatable seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

E71880

•

Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific seatbelt assembly
made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.

E67017

•

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.

The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The seatbelt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the seatbelts firmly
34

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelt warning light and chime.

Seatbelts
against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontal
crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar

E142588

The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.

2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.

Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and properly fasten
your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142587

Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a click and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.

E142590

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.

Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.

Automatic Locking Mode

Seatbelt Locking Modes

In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.

WARNING
If your vehicle is involved in a crash,
have the seatbelts and associated
components inspected as soon as
possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in
a rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 18).

All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat belts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.

How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode

Vehicle Sensitive Mode

Non-inflatable seatbelts

This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a

E142591

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.

Seatbelts
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.

WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second
row only–if equipped)

Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.

E146363

The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
50).

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode

How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?

Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
some side impact crashes and rollovers.
The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt
did not inflate in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.

The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.

Stowing the Rear Inflatable Seatbelt
The rear inflatable seatbelt has a snap
retainer for stowing the seatbelt against
the quarter trim panel when it is not in use.
This prevents the seatbelt tongue from
rattling against the side of the seat and
keeps it out of the way when folding or
tumbling the second row seats.

E146364

During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.

E209845

Press the retainer on the seatbelt onto the
mating snap to stow. To use the seatbelt,
pull it away from the quarter trim panel.

E146365

The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.

SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.

To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1.

Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
E71880
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.

E209844

Conditions of operation
If

Then

The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe warning chime sounds for a few
tion...
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...

The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...

The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.

SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.

If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts

If...

Then...

You and the front seat passenger buckle
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.

The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...

Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature

Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.

WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.

Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 20 seconds.

Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if you have
previously disabled the Belt-Minder, it will
be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See
MyKey™ (page 57). .

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.

We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 268).

SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.

Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Ford Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an
extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to
install child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over
the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seatbelts
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Personal Safety System™
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?

The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.

The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.

Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety
belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.

WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.

If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.

Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Do not place your arms on the airbag
cover or through the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.

Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Objects could become projectiles during
airbag deployment or in a sudden stop.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS

E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.

WARNINGS
Do not place your arms on the airbag
cover or through the steering wheel.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).

Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment

Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an
occupant's chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with advanced restraints
systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.

Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of
an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system. This could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.

E142846

Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.

E253275

The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The indicator lamp is in the center stack of
the instrument panel.

The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.

Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
off and on indicator lamps illuminate for a
short period of time when you first switch
the ignition on to confirm it is functional.

•

The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
•

•

When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the on lamp and remains
illuminated.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seatback in the full
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator off lamp remains lit
even after this, advise the person to
ride in the rear seat.

When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the off lamp and stays lit
to remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the on lamp, then
switch the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Occupant

Passenger airbag status
indicator

Passenger airbag

Empty

OFF: Lit

Disabled

ON: Unlit
Child

OFF: Lit

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Disabled

Supplementary Restraints System
Occupant

Passenger airbag status
indicator

Passenger airbag

ON: Unlit
Adult

OFF: Unlit

Enabled

ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator off light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.

SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.

After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.

Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.

Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
E67017
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 50).

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
227).

If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.

The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.

SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.

E152533

Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.

The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.

Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your seatbelt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.

E67017

•

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
50).

Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.

To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
If a supplementary restraint system
component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
49

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.

Always properly restrain children 12 years
old and under in the rear seats. The Safety
Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child
or booster seat because it is designed to
inflate downward from the headliner above
the doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.

E75004

The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment

Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, the
Safety Canopy and rear inflatable safety
belts. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.

•

A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:

E67017

•
•

The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.

The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.

If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal, side
and rollover crashes.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
and when a certain likelihood of
rollover is detected by the rollover
sensor. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.

Keys and Remote Controls
computers or cell phones can interfere with
remote operation. Operating your remote
control near metal or metallic-finished
purses, bags or clothing can interfere with
remote operation. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
• This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.

Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of any exterior
door handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity
of an intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.

WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle

If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 53).

Other short-distance radio transmitters,
such as amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote
controls and alarm systems may operate
on the same frequency as your remote
control. If other transmitters are operating
on those frequencies, you may not be able
to use your remote control. Using your
remote control near some types of
electronic equipment, such as USB devices,

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)

E138616

The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E210695

Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. You can also use the key
blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.

E142431

The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. You can also use the
key blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the
key blade, then pull the blade out.

E163047

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: A three-button remote control
operates similarly.

E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Replacing the Battery

4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.

Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.

Intelligent Access Key

Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.

Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.

The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter

E142432

2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.

E235202
1.

Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Carefully remove the rubber gasket
from the transmitter if it does not come
off with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery.

E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.

E235203

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Automatic
Climate Control (page 115).

5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.

Car Finder

Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.

Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138623

The horn sounds and the direction
indicators flash. We recommend you use
this method to locate your vehicle, rather
than using the panic alarm.

The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was
driven.

Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.

Sounding the Panic Alarm

E138624

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to

turn it off.

Remote Starting Your Vehicle

Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.

Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.

Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.

E138626

E138625

The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.

This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.

To start your vehicle remotely:
1.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.

Keys and Remote Controls
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.

2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 97).

You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).

Memory Feature (If Equipped)

Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the push button ignition switch on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.

You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, power steering column and power
adjustable foot pedals. Press the unlock
button on the remote control or unlock
your vehicle with the intelligent access key
to recall the memory positions. You can
program the remote control or intelligent
access key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 128).

The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL

Extending the Engine Running Time

Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 73).

To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 35
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
E138625

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

•

MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.

•

Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.

Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.

When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.

WARNING

Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.

Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.

Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).

MyKey™
•

•

Various vehicle speed reminders so you
know when your vehicle approaches
the limits. Warnings appear in the
information display and an audible
warning sounds when you exceed the
limit.
Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is

equipped with these features).

CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with
a push-button start, place the key fob into
the backup slot. The location of your
backup slot is in another chapter. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 148).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the arrow
keys to get to the following menu
selections:

Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

Create MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings

When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.

Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1.

Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:

MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

MyKey™

Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.

To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Settings

Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

MyKey

Press the OK button or the right arrow button.

Clear MyKey

Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.

All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

MyKey™
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 97).

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS

To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
Message

Description

Settings

Press the OK button.

MyKey

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist.

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} Admin Keys

Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

MyKey™
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition

I cannot create a MyKey.

Potential Causes

•
•

•

•
I cannot program the configurable
settings.

•
•

I cannot clear the MyKeys.

•
•

I lost the only admin key.

The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 73).
SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).
The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).

Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

MyKey™
Condition

Potential Causes

I lost a key.

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 73).

MyKey distances do not accumulate.

•
•
•

No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.

•
•

The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 58).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.

Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.

Locking the Doors

A
E138623

Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.

Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.

E224861

Unlock.

Lock.

Remote Control

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade

You can use the remote control at any
time.

Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.

Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.

Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.

E138629

Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.

Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you will only
turn off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.

Doors and Locks
Opening a Rear Door From the
Inside

Equipped)

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.

General Information

Locking Using Intelligent Access

Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.

Activating Intelligent Access (If

You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.

E248556

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.

The system will not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.

At the Liftgate

Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).

Press the exterior liftgate release button
on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
See Manual Liftgate (page 69).

Unlocking Using Intelligent Access

Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.

E248555

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Autolock

You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
• Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
• Pressing the lock button on the remote
control even if the doors are not closed.

Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).

If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.

Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)

Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.

This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park
(P) and the ignition off, the system will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close
the last door. If the system finds a key, all
of the doors will immediately unlock and
the horn sounds twice, indicating that a
key is inside.

Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.

You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.

Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn
sounds indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.

When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power
door unlock control. The horn sounds
once if disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn
sounds indicating programming is
complete.

Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition switched on and
the engine is not running, the battery saver
will turn the ignition off when it detects a
certain amount of battery drain, or after
45 minutes have elapsed.

Illuminated Entry

KEYLESS ENTRY

The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.

SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad

The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.

The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.

The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.

Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.

Battery Saver
E138637

If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.

You can use the keypad to do the
following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
• Recall memory seat and mirror
positions.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.

You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.

Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.

Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.

All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.

The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.

The anti-scan feature turns off after any
of the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.

Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors

Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)

Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.

The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Doors and Locks
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 63).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Liftgate
Opening the Liftgate

MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)

Manually

WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.

E138632

Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

Press the button in the top of the liftgate
pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, then
pull on the outside handle.
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138630

Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Closing the Liftgate

Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.

E268796

Handles are inside the liftgate to help with
closing.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)

•

•
•

If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight from
the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.

Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.

Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).

From the Instrument Panel

If there is a problem with the open or close
request, a tone sounds for one of the
following reasons:

E138633

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
The liftgate is not fully closed and your
vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).

With the transmission in park
(P), press the button on the
instrument panel.

Liftgate
Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138630

Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1.

Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.

E244708

Press and release the liftgate control
button in the rear cargo area.

Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.

E138632

Obstacle Detection

2. Press the button located in the top of
the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.

When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once your remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.

Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when using
the rear switch.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Liftgate
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Security
Replacement Keys

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM

Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.

Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.

The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.

The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®

Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.

The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.

Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.

If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.

You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle

Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.

Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.

Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.

Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1.
2.

3.
4.

8.
9.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM

Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.

The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•

•

If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).

•

Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.

If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.

Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position

ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN

The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.

To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1.

Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 123).

4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 128).

E261582

Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.

Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.

To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 97).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.

ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 123).

E259855

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:

E173608

E259854

1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

Seek up and down or next.

Media.

Volume up or down.

Mute.

MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
Seek, Next or Previous

See Using Cruise Control (page 189).

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.

Type Two

Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.

VOICE CONTROL
E173611

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 190).

INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL

E173609

Phone mode.

Voice recognition.

See your SYNC information.
E173617

CRUISE CONTROL

See Information Displays (page 97).

Type One

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)

Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.

E173610

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Steering Wheel
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Pedals (If Equipped)
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.

E162916

A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 128).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wipers and Washers
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.

E256816

Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.

E208496

•
•

Rotate away from you for long wipe
interval.
Rotate toward you for short wipe
interval.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.

Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.

In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.

AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wipers and Washers
Rear Window Wiper Blade

WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.

E208498

Intermittent wipe.

Low speed wipe.

Off.

Rear Window Washer
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to switch on the rear
washer. The control returns to the 2 or 0
position when you release it.

E208497

•
•

•

A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.

Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Switching on the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.

A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION

LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps

Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
E156651

Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.

Lamps off.

Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.

Headlamps.

Headlamp High Beam

If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.

E167827

Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Lighting
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high
beam off.

Flashing the Headlamp High Beam

E158778

E163268

When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.

Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.

WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
headlamps on in low visibility conditions,
for example daytime fog.

Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When you use the windshield washer.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
83

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Lighting
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
3. Switch the lighting control to the off
position.
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps turn on.
7. Switch the lighting control to the off
position when reaching the required
delay time. The headlamps and parking
lamps turn off.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER

Set the headlamp exit delay to one of the
following settings:
• Off.
• 10 seconds.
• 20 seconds.
• 120 seconds.

E163270

Adjust the brightness of the instrument
panel and all applicable lit components in
the vehicle during headlamp and parking
lamp operation.
•

•

Tap the top or bottom of the control
to brighten or dim all interior lit
components incrementally.
Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until you
reach the desired lighting level.
Press and hold the top of the control
to the full on position to activate the
“dome on” feature. This turns on the
interior courtesy lights. The lights
remain on until you press the bottom
of the control.

Note: Adjust the time delay using the
display controls in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 97).

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)

WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions.
Make sure you switch the headlamps on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
Set the delay time to keep the headlamps
on for up to three minutes after switching
off the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the
delay time:

The system turns the lamps on in daylight
conditions.

Note: Complete steps 1 through 6 within 10
seconds.
1.

To switch the system on, switch the
lighting control to the off, autolamp or
parking lamp position.

Switch the ignition off.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS

FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a button on the remote
control
• You press the outer edge of the clear
lens on the front row map lamp.
Front Row Map Lamps

E156823

Pull the lighting control toward you to
switch the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
off.

E166237

Second Row Reading Lamps
With Moonroof

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E173272

E163272

Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Lighting
Without Moonroof

E163274

Third Row Dome Lamps (If Equipped)

E163274

To switch on the lamps, press the outer
edge of the clear lens.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen. See your SYNC information.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back

POWER WINDOWS

The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.

WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

When closing the power windows,
verify they are free of obstruction and
make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.

Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.

Window Lock

E146043

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
E144072

One-Touch Down
Press the control to open the window.
Press again or lift it to stop the window.

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.

One-Touch Up

Accessory Delay

Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.

The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

E163060

B
A

Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.

E163059

Left-hand mirror.

Off.

Right-hand mirror.

Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in
or out.
Loose Mirror

To adjust a mirror:

If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.

1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center
position to lock the mirrors in place.

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.

To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors

(If Equipped)

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
121).

Memory Mirrors

(If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 128).

Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.

Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
E138665

WARNING

The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

Objects in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.

Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System
(page 196).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.

INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.

E162197

Auto-Dimming Mirror

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.

MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.

The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.

When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.

SUN VISORS

You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull
the shade toward the front of your vehicle
to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
E138666

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof

E163063

Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.

Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.

Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Note: Cluster shown in standard measure
– metric clusters similar.

GAUGES

E212029

Tachometer.

Speedometer.

Information Display. See
General Information (page
97).

Fuel Gauge.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster

E217329

Left information display. See
General Information (page
97).

Speedometer.

Right information display. See
your SYNC information.

Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 190).
E144524

WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS

On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.

The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.

Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Airbag Readiness

If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.

If this light fails to illuminate
when you switch the ignition on,
E67017
continues to flash or remains on,
it indicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer. A tone
sounds when there is a malfunction.

Charging System

Anti-Lock Braking System

It illuminates when the battery
is not charging properly.

If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.

If it stays on while the engine is
running , there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.

Battery

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
It illuminates when you switch
the system on.

If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.

E71340

See Using Cruise Control
(page 189).

Directional Indicator

Brake System

Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right or the hazard
warning flasher. If the indicators
stay on or flash faster, check for a burned
out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 261).

WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It may take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.

E144522

Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.

Engine Coolant Temperature

It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.

Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 250).

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil

High Beam

It illuminates when you switch
the ignition on.

It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.

If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient,
this indicates a system malfunction. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.

Liftgate Ajar
Illuminates when you do not
completely close the liftgate.
E162453

See Engine Oil Check (page 249).

Low Fuel Level

Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp

E71880

It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as

It illuminates and a chime
sounds until you fasten the
seatbelts.

possible.

Low Tire Pressure Warning

Front Airbag

It illuminates if the tire pressure
in one or more tires is below the
correct tire pressure.

If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
E67017
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.

It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.

Low Washer Fluid
Head Up Display (If Equipped)

It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.

A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield in
certain instances when using
adaptive cruise control and/or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate
momentarily when you start your vehicle
to make sure the display works.

E132353

E156133

Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Off

Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power

It illuminates when you switch
the system off.

Illuminates when a powertrain
or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

E130458

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS

Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.

Key in Ignition Warning Chime

If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.

Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.

It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.

Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.

Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.

Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

Headlamps On Warning Chime

Parking Brake On Warning Chime

Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 160).

Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.

Stability Control
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
E138639
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 179).
96

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
E204495
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.

E214426

•

•
•
•

•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.

•
•
•
•

Trip 1 & 2
Fuel Economy
Information
Settings

Trip 1 & 2
Trip 1 & 2

Speedometer
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.

Elapsed trip time

Shows vehicle speed digitally.

When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.

Trip distance

Fuel Economy

Shows the accumulated trip distance.

Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.

Speedometer

Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a
given trip.
Fuel Economy

Inst Fuel Econ
Average Fuel
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.

Average Fuel
This display shows the average fuel
consumption since the function was last
reset.

Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Information
Information
Intelligent AWD
MyKey® Distance (if key is programmed) — Distance traveled when a programmed key
is in use.
MyKey® Information — Number of MyKeys and admin keys programmed)
Coolant Temp. — The engine coolant indicator will change colors indicating: blue for
cool, gray for normal and red for hot. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Settings
Settings
Driver Assist

Traction Ctrl
Blindspot
Collision Warn

Sensitivity

High, Normal or
Low

Chimes
Warning
Cross Traffic
Cruise Control

Adaptive or Normal

Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Display

Convenience

Language

Select your applicable language

Units

Distance

Miles & GAL, l/
100km or km/l

Temperature

Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C)

Auto Engine Off

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Autolamp Delay

Autolamp Delay

Compass

Display
Calibrate
Set Zone

DTE calculation

Normal or Towing

Easy Entry/Exit
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Remote Unlock

All Doors or
Driver's First

Oil Life Reset

Set to XXX%

Power Liftgate

Switch Enabled or Switch Disabled

Remote Start

Climate Control

Auto or Last
Settings

Seats and Wheel or
Seats

Automatic or Off

Duration

5, 10 or 15 minutes

System
Windows

Remote Open

Wipers

Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing

MyKey

Create MyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKey

911 Assist

Always On or User Selectable

Traction Ctrl
Max Speed

Choose desired speed or Off

Speed Minder

100

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Volume Limiter
Do Not Disturb
Clear MyKeys

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
•

Information Display Controls
(Type 2)

•

Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•

Display Mode
Trip 1 & 2
Fuel Economy
Driver Assist
Settings

Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.

E217330

•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.

101

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays

Display Mode

Option 1

XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometer

Option 2

Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometer

Option 3

Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total
odometer

Option 4

Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometer

Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST), the cluster will change to the round tachometer if not already selected.
XXX mi (km) to empty

Round tachometer

Shows approximate fuel level before the
fuel tank reaches empty. The value is
dynamic and can change (raise or lower)
depending on driving style.

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.

Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door
side of your vehicle. When the fuel level
becomes low, the level indicator will
change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low, the level indicator
will change to red.

Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.

Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.

Trip 1 & 2
Choose between the following trip
displays.

Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.

Trip 1 & 2

Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset

102

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Elapsed trip time

Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.

When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.

Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.

Fuel Economy

Average fuel economy

Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.

Shows the average fuel economy for a
given trip.

Fuel Economy

Inst Fuel Economy
30 Min Fuel History
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.

Driver Assist

Inst Fuel Economy

Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.

This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.

Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

30 Min Fuel History
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.

Driver Assist

Traction Control
Blindspot
Collision Warn

Sensitivity

High, Normal or Low

Cross Traffic
Cruise Control

Adaptive or Normal

Driver Alert
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid

103

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

—

Information Displays
Settings

driver setting choices.

In this mode, you can configure different

Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

Settings

Vehicle

Drive
Control

Handling in D

Sport, Normal or Comfort

Handling in S

Sport or Normal

Auto Engine Off
DTE Calcula- Normal or Towing
tion
Easy Entry / Exit
Lighting

Autolamp Delay

Locks

Autolock

Select time interval

Autounlock
Remote Unlocking

All doors or Driver door

Oil Life
Reset

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset

Power Liftgate

Switch Enabled or Switch Disabled

Remote
Start

Climate Control

Auto or Last Settings

Seats and Wheel or Auto Heated or Off
Seats
Duration

5, 10 or 15 minutes

System
Windows

Remote Open
Remote Close

Wipers

Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing

MyKey

Mykey
Status

MyKeys and Admin Keys

Create
MyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKey

104

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Settings

911 Assist

Always On or User Selectable

Traction
Control
Max Speed

Choose desired speed or off

Speed Minder
Volume
Limiter

On or Off

Do Not
Disturb

Always On or User Selectable

MyKey
Report

On or Off

Clear
MyKeys

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys

Display Settings Distance

Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/l

Gauge
Display

Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach

Language

Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to Set

Temperature

Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)

Note: Some MyKey items will only appear
if a MyKey is set.

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.

E173229

Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.

105

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message

Action

Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 190).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available

Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 190).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 190).

AdvanceTrac™
Message

Action

Service AdvanceTrac

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

AdvanceTrac Off On

The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the
driver.

Alarm
Message

Action

Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.

The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See
Anti-Theft Alarm (page 74).

Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message

Action

Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds

The engine is getting ready to shut off.

Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy

The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.

Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override

The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.

106

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
AWD
Message

Action

AWD OFF

Displays if the AWD system disables to protect itself. This
may occur if you operate the vehicle after installing the
compact spare tire, if the system is overheating or if there is
an issue with another vehicle system that prevents the AWD
system from operating. The AWD system resumes normal
operation and clears this message after you install the road
tire and you switch the ignition on and off, or after you allow
the system to cool. If this message remains on, have a qualified technician service your vehicle to repair other vehicle
systems.

Check AWD

The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly and the
powertrain fault indicator is illuminated. See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 93). If the warning stays illuminated
or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

Battery and Charging System
Message

Action

Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge
has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.

107

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message

Action

Blindspot System Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer
Sensor Blocked See
as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System
Manual
(page 196).
Vehicle Coming From X

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 196).

Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See
Manual

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 196).

Cross Traffic System
Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Brake System
Message

Action

Brake Fluid Level Low

The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be
inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 256).

Check Brake System

The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake Engaged

The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

108

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Collision Warning System
Message

Action

Collision Warning
Malfunction

There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front
of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Collision Warning Not
Available

There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Doors and Locks
Message

Action

X Door Ajar

The door listed is not completely closed.

Trunk Ajar

The luggage compartment is not completely closed.

Engine ON

The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the
engine is on.

Fuel
Message

Action

Fuel Level Low

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.

109

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.

No Key Detected

The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting
(page 147).

Restart Now or Key is
Needed

The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and
an Intelligent Access key is not detected inside your vehicle.

Accessory Power is
Active

Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.

Starting System Fault

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.

Key Programmed x Keys
Total

During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
programmed to the system.

Max Number of Keys
Learned

During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys
have been programmed.

Maintenance
Message

Action

Low Engine Oil Pressure

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Change Engine Oil Soon

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 249).

Oil Change Required

The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 249).

Engine Coolant Over
Temperature

The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.

Washer Fluid Level Low

The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.

Transport Mode Contact Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
Dealer
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer

Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.

110

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
MyKey
Message

Action

MyKey not Created

MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .

MyKey Active Drive
Safely

MyKey is active.

Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h

When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on.

Near Vehicle Top Speed When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Check Speed Drive
Safely

MyKey is active.

Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio

A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.

Could Not Program
Integrated Key

An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.

Park Aid
Message

Action

Check Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
180).

Check Rear Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
180).

Rear Park Aid On Off

The park aid status.

111

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Power Steering
Message

Action

Steering Fault Service
Now

The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.

Service Power Steering
Now

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault
Service Required

The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Seats
Message

Action

Occupant Sensor
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
BLOCKED Remove
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
Objects Near Passenger come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Seat

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message

Action

Tire Pressure Low

One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 293).

Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 293).

Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. For more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 293). If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

112

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Information Displays
Traction Control
Message

Action

Traction Control Off

Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 177).

Transmission
Message

Action

Shift to Park

You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any
position other than P (Park).

Towing
Message

Action

Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed

The system detects trailer sway, so you need to reduce your
speed.

113

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

E210700

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.

Note: Recirculated air may turn
on and off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

114

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.

Climate Control
E

MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel
vents, air conditioning turns on
and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed.

Temperature control: Adjusts
the temperature of the air
circulated in your vehicle.

Rear fan speed control:
Adjusts the volume of air
circulated to the rear of the
passenger compartment.

Rear passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature to the rear of the
passenger compartment.

Rear climate control lock:
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.

Rear passenger power: Press
to switch the rear system on and
off.

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
121).

Defrost: Press to distribute air
through the windshield air vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to
the instrument panel and
footwell vents turns off. You can
also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.

E210701

115

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control
A

Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.

Power and fan speed control:
Press to switch the system on
and off. When the system is off,
it prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle. Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

DUAL: Press to switch on
temperature control for the
passenger side of the vehicle.
When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the
same as the driver settings.

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.

Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging or to
improve cooling efficiency.
E

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.

AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
121).

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.

116

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control

E210702

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
121).

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.

117

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control
G

Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.

Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.

Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging or to
improve cooling efficiency.
H

Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control

Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.

Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

Automatic Climate Control

Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.

Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE

Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.

General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.

Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.

Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.

118

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

Recommended Settings for Heating
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

Quickly Cooling the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Select MAX A/C.

Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.

119

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
distribution buttons.

Press A/C.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS

120

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control

E210706

Rear fan speed control:
Adjusts the volume of air
circulated to the rear passenger
compartment.

Rear air distribution control:
Press to switch the direction of
airflow.

Rear passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting for the rear
passenger compartment.

Rear heated seats: Press to
switch the rear heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats
(page 136).

HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.

Heated Rear Window
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
E184884
and fog. The heated rear
window turns off after a short period of
time. Press the button again to switch it
off.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

Fan speed control lock: When
illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.

Heated Exterior Mirrors
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.

121

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Climate Control
Some features may remain on if they turn
on during remote start:
• Driver heated seat.
• Driver cooled seat.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.

CABIN AIR FILTER

Note: If the passenger heated or cooled
seats are on when you switch the vehicle
off, they default to the driver setting when
you switch the vehicle on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.

You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 97).

Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and you select AUTO in the
information display).

You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.

In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on pre-selected
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.

Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 447).

In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats and heated
steering wheel are set to high (if available,
and you select AUTO in the information
display). The rear defroster and heated
mirrors turn on.

For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.

REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.

122

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.

SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.

Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.

The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.

123

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.

Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint

Front Seat Head Restraints

Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1.

Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.

E138642

Second Row Center Seat Head
Restraint (If Equipped)

Installing the Head Restraint
1.

Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second Row Outermost Seat Head
Restraints

E138645

The head restraints consist of:
A

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

Two steel stems.

E162872

124

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
The head restraints consist of:
A

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

B
C

The head restraints consist of:
A

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

Two steel stems.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
buttons.

Fold strap.

Folding the Head Restraint

The outermost head restraints are
non-adjustable, but they can be removed.

Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head
restraint back up to reset.

Removing the Head Restraint

Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to fold the head
restraint.

Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.

Tilting Head Restraints

(If Equipped)

Installing the Head Restraint
1.

Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third Row Head Restraints (If
Equipped)

E144727

The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort.
1.

Adjust the seat backrest to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.

E190836

After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.

125

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing loss of control of
your vehicle.
E190837

Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.

Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)

E209846
E190838

POWER SEATS

Recline Adjustment
WARNING

WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.

Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.

Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.

126

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats

E138647

127

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)

E205043

Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.

E138648

MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)

Recalling a PreSet Position

WARNINGS
Before activating the memory seat,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.

Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
You can recall a programmed memory
position:
• Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if the
ignition is on.
• In any gearshift position if the ignition
is not on.

Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.

You can also recall a programmed memory
position by:
• Pressing your remote control
transmitter unlock button (if the
remote control is programmed to a
memory position).
• Unlocking your vehicle with an
intelligent access key (if it is
programmed to a memory position).

The memory control is on the driver door.

Note: Using a linked keyfob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
128

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Note: Adjusting any active memory feature
or pressing a memory switch during a
memory recall cancels the operation.

REAR SEATS

Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob

Second Row Seats

Adjusting the Rear Seats

WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1.

With the ignition on, move the memory
features to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.

Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat's
seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
Recline Adjustment

To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature

E209847

This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit
and entry to the vehicle.

Note: For the bench seat only, make sure
the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.

The driver seat automatically moves 2 in
(5 cm) rearward when the transmission is
in park (P) and you remove the key from
the ignition or you switch the ignition off.

Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. You can also fold the
seatback forward until it is flat.

The driver seat and steering wheel return
to their previous positions when you put
the key in the ignition or switch the ignition
on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 97).

129

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Note: When you switch the ignition off, the
power fold feature works until the battery
saver turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Doors and Locks
(page 63). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.

Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If equipped)

Third Row Seats (Accessing the Seat)
WARNINGS
Check under the seat cushion to
make sure no cargo or objects are
under the seat cushion before
returning the seat cushion to its original
position, and that the seat cushion locks
into place. Failure to do so may prevent
the seat from operating properly in the
event of a crash, which could increase the
risk of serious injury.

E190838

Power Fold and Tumble Seat
WARNING
Do not fold a seat if it is occupied.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

Do not adjust a seat or release a seat
floor latch when the vehicle is
moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in a sudden stop or crash.

This feature is available for the right-hand
seat on seven-passenger vehicles and on
both sides for six-passenger vehicles.

Do not drive your vehicle with a seat
that is unlatched or in the folded
position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.

E190848

The control is at the back of the rear door
opening. Press it to fold the seatback down
and tumble the seat forward for access to
the third row.

Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.

130

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row.

E190845

3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.

E209848

Lift the handle on the side of the seat.
The seatback folds flat.

E209849
E190844

4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear
latch hooks are not properly engaged to the
floor striker. If the seatback does not raise,
then repeat Step 4.

2. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the
third row. Note: The seatback must be
folded flat in order to release the floor
latches. Make sure that there are no
objects on the seat cushion that may
restrict the seatback from folding flat.

131

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Third Row Seat Exit

E209849

3. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat steps 3 and 4.

E209850

Pull on the strap on the back of the
second row seat. This folds the
seatback forward. Pull the strap a
second time to tumble the seat
forward, allowing easy exit from the
third row seat. Note: You must fold the
seatback flat in order to release the
floor latches. Make sure that there are
no objects on the seat cushion that
may restrict the seatback from folding
flat.

E190847

4. Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.

E190850

2. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.

132

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.

Stowing the Third Row Seat
Note: Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub. Objects in the seat or stowage
tub may cause serious damage to the seat
upholstery and cause improper seat
function.

E209853

Note: Do not use the third row seat back as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Sharp objects may result in damage to seat
upholstery.

E210069

Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.

From the rear of the vehicle, stow the
head restraints by pulling the strap on
the middle of the seatback just below
the head restraint. Then, fold the
seatback by pulling and holding the red
strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release the strap once the
seatback starts rotating forward.

Unstowing the Third Row Seat
WARNING
Make sure the seat fully locks into
place by rocking it backward and
forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in a
crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or brief cases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Make sure the area under the forward
portion of the load floor is free of objects
before unstowing the third row seat.

E209852

2. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on
the strap at the top of the seatback.
This tumbles the seat all the way into
the floor tub.

133

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then, while
holding the red strap, pull the long
strap on the seatback to raise the
seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their
normal positions.
PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If
equipped)
The third row seat features a power
one-touch operation that allows you to
adjust the left, right, or both seats into a
NORMAL, STOW, FOLD, or TAILGATE
position with just one touch of a button.

E209854

Unlatch and lift the seat out of the floor
tub by squeezing and pulling up on the
handle. Once the seat is at a vertical
position, push the seat over, letting it
fall onto the latches.

Note: The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
tailgate is open. If the ignition is off and the
feature is still running, the battery saver
turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Keyless Entry
(page 66). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.
The third row power seat buttons are
behind the third row seats on the left-hand
quarter trim panel.

E209852

134

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats

E209855

Press to return the seat to the
normal seating position.

Press to stow the seat into the
tub floor.

Press the top of the button to
fold down the seatback. Press
the bottom portion of the button
to put the seat into the tailgate
position.

Press to select either right-hand
seat, the left-hand seat or both.

Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third
row power seat stops prematurely or travels
to an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.

Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.

WARNING
Do not sit in seats that are rearward
facing when your vehicle is moving.
This is not a correct seating position
and the seatbelts do not properly function
this way. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.

Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.

135

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

E245760

HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)

Second Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)

Front Seats

WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.

WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.

136

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Seats
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

E146322

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

(If Equipped)

Cooled Seats

Heated Seats

Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.

E146309

Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off. You will need to reactivate
it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not required.

137

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.

E142657

Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.

The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.

Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.

In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.

Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.

Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.

138

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor

E142658

With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.

Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.

4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.

E142658

3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.

If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.

139

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming

Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.

Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.

Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:

Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.

Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.

Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.

For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener

Erasing the Function Button Codes

Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.

Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.

E142660

140

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
1.

Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.

Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor

Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.

E142661

Red indicator light

Green indicator light

Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.

E142662

Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.

Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:

141

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

142

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point

Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.

WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.

WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.

If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.

Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.

Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.

You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.

E194174

Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.

143

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.

144

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Storage Compartments
Second Row Center Console (If

CENTER CONSOLE

Equipped)

Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:

E211667

E210728

Front storage compartment.

Cup holder.

Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point and
USB ports.

Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter.

Rear storage compartment.

Auxiliary power point.

Rear climate controls.

Cup holder.

Armrest.

Utility compartment and
refrigerator unit.

Console Refrigerator and Freezer
(If Equipped)

This feature operates when the vehicle is
on or in accessory mode. Limit the time of
use when the vehicle is in accessory mode
to avoid the vehicle battery running out of
charge. You should only use this feature
when the vehicle is running.

E211653

145

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Storage Compartments
This feature turns off when you switch the
vehicle off. It turns back on to the last
mode when you restart the vehicle.

Flip the console lid forward, then lift off the
cover to open the cooling compartment.
Make sure to replace the cover after using
it. This helps maintain a more consistent
cooling temperature.

Cleaning and Maintenance
Note: Condensation on the inside walls of
the refrigerator is normal under certain
conditions.
This feature is maintenance free, but you
can clean the inside of the unit and the
cover with a mild soap and water solution.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E75193

Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.

E211668

Refrigerator: Briefly press and hold
COOL. The indicator light on the cool side
of the switch illuminates and the indicator
light on the freeze side glows when the
refrigerator is active. The temperature
cools to approximately 41°F (5°C). Briefly
press and hold COOL again to switch off
the refrigerator. Briefly press and hold
FREEZE to change to freezer mode.
Freezer: Briefly press and hold FREEZE.
Both indicator lights illuminate when the
freezer is active. The temperature cools to
approximately 23°F (-5°C). Press FREEZE
again to switch off the freezer. Press COOL
to change to refrigerator mode.

146

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

E252522

A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.

B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.

The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.

D (start) - Cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)

When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.

Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.

147

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.

STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE

Ignition Modes

When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.

E191075

The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.

Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.

On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.

Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
•

Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.

148

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.

Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.

Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.

If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:

E198728

Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.

149

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.

Automatic Engine Shutdown Override

Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.

You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 97). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.

Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.

Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary

Automatic Engine Shutdown

Vehicles with an Ignition Key

For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.

1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.

150

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving

Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.

WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)

WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1.

Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.

Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.

Vehicles with Keyless Start
1.

Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.

Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.

151

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.

The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.

Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.

152

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

•

WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.

•

The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.

•

Fuels can cause serious injury or
death if misused or mishandled.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is
a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

•

Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.

Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.

FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

153

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87.

The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.

For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 210).

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION

Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.

We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.

If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.

Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.

Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.

Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.

154

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.

Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container

E157452

WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground.

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.

Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 154).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1.

Fully open the fuel filler door.

155

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING

Refueling System Overview

C
E206911

E267248

Fuel filler door.

Fuel tank filler valve.

Fuel tank filler pipe.

Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.

Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.

Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.

Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.

Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.

Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
156

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not pry open the fuel tank filler
valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.

Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.

E139202

3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.

Wait at least five seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.

1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.

E139203

4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

157

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
A

3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
154). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.

E206912

5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.

If this action corrects the problem the
message may not immediately reset. If the
message remains and a warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.

E119081

6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.

Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.

Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message may appear in the
information display.

Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.

Message

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Fuel Economy

If the message appears, do the following:

Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 97).

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).

158

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuel and Refueling
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
Fully loading your vehicle.
Carrying unnecessary weight.
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 153).
Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.

159

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
Tampering With a Noise Control
System

EMISSION LAW
WARNING

Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.

Do not remove or alter the original
equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal
floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.

U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.

If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.

160

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
•
•

Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.

WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.

Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance

To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 223).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.

On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.

Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

The normal operating temperature
of the exhaust system is very high.
Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.

The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.

161

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
1.

Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 156).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.

Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.

You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.

If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.

Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.

Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.

When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:

If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

162

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1.

15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.

163

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Transmission
Reverse (R)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).

WARNINGS
Always fully apply the parking brake.
Make sure you shift into park (P) for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.

Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.

Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than a few seconds will limit
engine performance, which may result in
difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and
could lead to serious injury.

Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.

Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission

Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This increases
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.

Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).

SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.

E142628

Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.

164

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Transmission
You can achieve extensive manual control
by moving the gearshift lever to the sport
(S) position.

In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.

•
•

Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
E144821

SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.

The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and
returns to automatic control.

If equipped with the toggle on the
gearshift lever:

Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:

•
•

Press the (+) button to upshift.
Press the (-) button to downshift.

Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)

Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)

3-4

40 mph (64 km/h)

4-5

45 mph (72 km/h)

5-6

50 mph (80 km/h)

The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear.

E142629

If equipped with steering wheel
paddles:

Note: The system stays in manual control
until you make another shift selection (for
example, drive [D]).

With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.

165

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

1-2
2-3

Transmission
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the stoplamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you need
to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can
roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully apply the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.

E211089

2. Remove the cup holder insert.
3. Using a screwdriver (or similar tool),
release the tab to the access door and
remove.
4. Locate the brake shift interlock lever
on the passenger side of the shifter
assembly.
5. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
down and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift lever
out of park (P) and into neutral (N).
6. Install the access door and cup holder
insert.
7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 234).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1.

Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition off and remove the key.

166

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

167

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: When an AWD system fault is
present, the warning Check AWD displays
in the information display. The AWD system
is not functioning correctly and defaults to
front-wheel drive. When this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.

USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.

Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to
front-wheel drive. This may occur if the
vehicle is operated in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function as
soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
minutes. After the engine has been
restarted and the AWD system has
adequately cooled, the AWD OFF message
will turn off and normal AWD function
returns. If the engine is not stopped, the
AWD OFF message turns off when the
system cools and normal AWD function
returns.

Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.

All-Wheel Drive Messages
AWD Messages

AWD OFF

Action / Description

168

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
AWD Messages

Action / Description

normal operation and clears this message
after you install the road tire and you switch
the ignition on and off, or after you allow
the system to cool. If this message remains
on, have a qualified technician service your
vehicle to repair other vehicle systems.
Check AWD

Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/reduced power light
when the system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires

Operating AWD Vehicles With
Spare Tires

WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver's door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.

A spare tire of a different size other than
the tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically
and enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components if a non-full
sized tire is installed. This condition may
display an AWD OFF message in the
information display. If there is an AWD OFF
message in the information display from
using a non-full sized spare tire, this
indicator should turn off after reinstalling
the repaired or replaced normal road tire
and cycling the ignition off and on. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired or
replaced road tire as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system.

169

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The use of non-recommended tires
and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you have
questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Basic operating principles in special
conditions

Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system. However, the AWD
system is capable of tolerating any
combination of new and worn tires of the
same original tire size. For example, using
3 worn tread tires and 1 new tread tire all
of the same original tire size, can be
tolerated by the AWD system.

If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement

•

Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
•

AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.

170

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
•

Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.

•

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.

Sand

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip
through Brake, Engine, and AWD
calibrations. However, during low speed
driving, disabling traction control in deep
sand can help keep the wheels moving to
maintain vehicle momentum.

If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.

When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.

Emergency Maneuvers
•

In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (that is, turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and
as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid

Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could
cause the AWD system to overheat and
default to front-wheel drive. If this occurs,
an AWD OFF message displays in the
information display. To resume normal
AWD function as soon as possible, stop
the vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD

171

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from
concrete to gravel) there will be a
change in the way the vehicle responds
to a maneuver (steering, acceleration
or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
system has adequately cooled, the AWD
OFF message turns off and normal AWD
function returns. In the event the engine is
not stopped, the AWD OFF message turns
off when the system cools and normal
AWD function returns.

Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.

When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L
(Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear
operation will maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability.

After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.

Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.

Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.

Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.

If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, have the power transfer unit (PTU)
or rear axle serviced by an authorized
dealer.

Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”

When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.

172

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice

Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.

WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.

When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.

E143949

Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.

Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 176).

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.

173

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.

174

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Brakes
Brake Assist

GENERAL INFORMATION

Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 273).

If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.

It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.

See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 93).
E144522

Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.

E144522

Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.

175

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.

Brakes
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.

PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and

176

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Traction Control
Using the Information Display
Controls

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.

You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).

If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.

Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

System Indicator Lights and
Messages

Using a Switch (If Equipped)

The stability and traction control
light:

WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

E138639

•
•
•

The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
E130458
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
177

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.

Stability Control
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.

•
•

If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.

The stability and traction control light
flashes.
Your vehicle slows down.
Reduced engine power.
A vibration in the brake pedal.
The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.

The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

178

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.

Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 177).

B
B
A
A

E72903

Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.

Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.

USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 177).

179

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
connected to prevent the alert.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.

The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.

The system may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb reflection.
Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.

The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 97).

Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes, external motors
and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.

If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 105).

The system may not detect small or
moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.

REAR PARKING AID

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 57).

The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.

180

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are
still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.

The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause interference.

The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).

Active park assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The blind spot information system
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during an active park assist
maneuver.
Note: Active park assist is a multi-step
process and may require you to shift your
transmission multiple times. Follow the
on-screen instructions until you complete
the parking process.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
your vehicle (hands-free) while you control
the accelerator, transmission and brakes.
The system visually and audibly guides you
to park your vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel or pushing the active park
assist button.

181

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
The system may not operate correctly in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are improperly
inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
• The edge of the neighboring parking
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow or
fog.

Note: Following a change in tire size, the
system must recalibrate and operation may
be impaired for a short time.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer
or other object near the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle.
• You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use. For
example, when using a mini-spare tire.

Using Active Park Assist
Press the button to turn the
system on or off.
E146186

Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
fascia, free from now, ice and large
accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects.

When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left hand side or
right hand side of your vehicle. If the
direction indicator is not used, the system
defaults to the passenger side of your
vehicle.

Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference. For
example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air
brakes or horns.

E130107

182

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
When the system finds a suitable space it
displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the display screen. If your
vehicle is moving very slowly, you may
need to pull forward a short distance
before the system is ready to park.

Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last detected space.
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.

Note: You can also activate the system
after you drive partially or completely pass
the parking space. To do so, press the active
park assist button and the system informs
you if you recently passed a suitable parking
space.

Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted, for
example driver input is detected, the system
switches off and you need to take full
control of your vehicle.

Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.

When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the
steering wheel and nothing obstructing its
movement, your vehicle steers itself into
the space. The system displays instructions
to move your vehicle back and forth in the
space.

E130108

When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a chime
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.

When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid
(accompanied by a touchscreen display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.

183

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature

Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.

Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control
system.

If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.

Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.

The system does not offer a particular space

The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can
affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect,
the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for a short period of time.

184

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids

The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space

Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling
forward when the transmission is in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size or of a different size.
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from
a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
WARNINGS

REAR VIEW CAMERA

Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure
to follow this instruction could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
personal injury or death.

WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.

Do not switch the camera features
on or off when your vehicle is moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle. During operation, lines appear in
the display which represent your vehicle’s
path and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.

Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Use caution when the rear cargo door
is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,
the camera will be out of position
and the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
door is ajar. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.

185

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides
during normal operation and some objects
may not be seen. In some vehicles, the
guidelines disappear when you connect the
trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.

E142435

The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.

Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).

Active Guidelines (If Equipped)
Note: Active guidelines are only shown with
fixed guidelines while your vehicle is in
reverse (R).

Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).

186

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Fixed Guidelines

B C

Note: Fixed guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Note: The centerline is only available if
fixed guidelines are on.

D
C

E
A

B
E163914

F
E142436

Active guideline

Centerline

Fixed guideline: Green zone

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

Fixed guideline: Red zone

Rear bumper

Fixed guideline: Red Zone

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

Fixed guideline: Green zone

Centerline

Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.

To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.

Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.

187

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Parking Aids
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Manual zoom allows you to get a closer
view of an object behind your vehicle. The
zoomed image keeps the bumper in the
image to provide a reference. The zoom
feature is only active while the
transmission is in reverse (R).
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See Settings (page 415).
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot (If
Equipped)
The system provides an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones in the display
screen. The zones highlight green, yellow
and red when the parking aid sensors
detect an object in the coverage area.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.

188

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Cruise Control
The indicator appears in the
information display.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
E71340

Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.

USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.

Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.

When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed could increase above
the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.

•
•

Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.

•

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.

Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.

Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.

E173610

The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.

Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.

189

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.

WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.

Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.

Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections
or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.

The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.

Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with aftermarket trailer
brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.

E173611

The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.

Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press ON.

Adaptive cruise control may not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

E144529

Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.

190

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.

Cruise Control
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.

E164805

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed

Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.

Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.

Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.

E164805

5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.

191

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Cruise Control
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.

The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.

Graphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles

Dynamic behavior

Sport.

Normal.

Comfort.

Setting the Gap Distance
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.

Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.

Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.

Overriding the Set Speed

You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.

WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
E144529

E173611

The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.

E164805

192

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed

Hilly Condition Usage

•

Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.

•

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.

Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.

The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off

Canceling the Set Speed

Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.

Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The
set speed does not erase.

Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.

Detection Issues

Press RES. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

WARNINGS
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.

Automatic Cancellation
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.

If the system malfunctions, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h).

The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.

Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The tires lose traction.
• The engine speed is too low.
• You apply the parking brake.

193

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Cruise Control
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.

System Not Available
The system may not turn on if there is:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.

Blocked Sensor

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

E145632

When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.

Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.

With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.

There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.

A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.

194

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Cruise Control

Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
Cause

Action

The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.

Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.

195

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING

Using the System

Never use the Blind Spot
Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.

The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 3 mph
(5 km/h).

For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).

System Lights and Messages

E124788

The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.

E142442

The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
196

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
System Sensor Blockage

Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.

System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 105).

E205199

The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.

System Limitations
The system does have its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
may limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the system:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind zone.

Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system
will no longer provide any vehicle warnings.
You can clear the information display
warning but the alert indicators will remain
illuminated.

Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
97). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows
a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.

A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.

Note: The system switches back on every
time you start your vehicle.

197

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.

Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)

Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).

WARNING

Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.

Never use the Cross Traffic Alert
system as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before backing
out of a parking space. Cross Traffic Alert
is not a replacement for careful driving.

E142440

In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.

198

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids

E142441

The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 180).

Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.

System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts

E205199

E142442

The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot

199

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
Information System (page 196). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).

False Alerts

System Limitations

There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.

Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.

Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
The system detects approaching vehicles
from up to 45 ft (14 m) away, though
coverage decreases when the sensors are
blocked. Reversing slowly helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.

System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105).

The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
• Adjacently parking vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.

Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.

If the rear end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.

200

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
Steering Tips

STEERING

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.

Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.

If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.

COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.

WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure
to press the brake pedal to activate the
brakes may result in a collision.

201

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the brakes
but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force
braking is applied even if the brake pedal
is lightly pressed.

WARNINGS
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).

Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.

E156130

This system is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks. A radar detects if
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.

The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 97).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See General
Information (page 97).

E156131

If it is, a red warning light illuminates and
an audible warning chime sounds.

Blocked Sensors

E145632

202

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are

obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.

Cause

Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or obstructed in some way
or remove the object causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automatwith the radar signals
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface The collision warning system is temporarily
of the road may interfere with the radar disabled. Collision warning should automatically reactivate a short time after the
signals
weather conditions improve
•

System Limitations
WARNING

•

The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.

•
•

If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.

Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•
•
•

Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

203

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
Small distance to vehicle ahead.
Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).

Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS

CARGO NETS
WARNING

WARNING

This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.

When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the roof rack, is 100 lb
(45 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
You must place loads directly on the
crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails.
When using the roof rack system, we
recommend that you use genuine Ford
accessory crossbars specifically designed
for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.

E210596

LOAD LIMIT

The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
provided anchors. Do not put more than
50 lb (22 kg) in the net.

Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
204

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Load Carrying
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.

Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:

E198719

Payload

PAYLOAD

E143816

205

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.

WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
206

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Load Carrying
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)

Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:

GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.

E198828

WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the performance
and handling of your vehicle,
cause vehicle damage and can
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.

WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
207

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNINGS
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating can adversely affect
the performance and handling of
your vehicle, cause vehicle
damage and can result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)

Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.

208

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Load Carrying
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.

The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
When loading the roof racks,
we recommend you evenly
distribute the load, as well as
maintain a low center of gravity.
Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Take extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.

209

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing
Load Placement

TOWING A TRAILER

To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in the Load Carrying
chapter. See Load Limit (page
204).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.

WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have
electrical items, such as fuses or
relays, related to towing. See
Fuses (page 234).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.

210

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)

Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) if
your vehicle can tow a class I
trailer, or 40 ft² (3.72 m²) if your
vehicle can tow a class III trailer.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Check
state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to
this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.

WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
204).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.

211

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
Powertrain and
trailer class

maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.

Maximum GCWR

Maximum trailer
weight

3.5L TiVCT frontwheel drive, Class I

6,900 lb (3,131 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

3.5L TiVCT all-wheel
drive, Class I

7,050 lb (3,199 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

3.5L GTDi all-wheel
drive, Class I

7,070 lb (3,208 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

3.5L TiVCT frontwheel drive, Class III

9,355 lb (4,244 kg)

4,500 lb (2,042 kg)

3.5L TiVCT all-wheel
drive, Class III

9,520 lb (4,319 kg)

4,500 lb (2,042 kg)

3.5L GTDi all-wheel
drive, Class III

9,620 lb (4,364 kg)

4,500 lb (2,042 kg)

For towing trailers up to 3500 lb (1588 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch
and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your
vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers over 3500 lb (1588
kg), up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), we recommend you use a
weight-distributing hitch to increase front axle load while towing.
**

For towing trailers up to 4500 lb (2042 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch
and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your
vehicle's underbody structure.

212

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing
Trailer Towing Connector
(Vehicles with a Trailer Towing
Package and 7–Pin Connector)

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 447).
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 204).

E211391

When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.

Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.

Color

213

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Function

Yellow

Left turn signal and stop lamp

White

Ground (-)

Blue

Electric brakes

Green

Right turn signal and stop
lamp

Orange

Battery (+)

Brown

Running lights

Grey

Reverse lights

Towing
Hitches

Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.

Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.

To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

Trailer Brakes

WARNING

Do not adjust the spring bars so that
your vehicle's rear bumper is higher
than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.

Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.

When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park your vehicle, without the trailer,
on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight distributing bars so that the
height of the front fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and
H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not
level, adjust the ball height accordingly
and repeat Steps 3–6.

The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.

Trailer Brake Controller Connector
(If Equipped)

The connector is located under the
instrument panel above the brake pedal.

Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.

214

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.

When Towing a Trailer
•

•
•

•

E211392

•

Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.

•

Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
•

•
1.

215

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.

Towing
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot
shift into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
164).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.

Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 114).

Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.

Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.

Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which
is not a normal maintenance inspection
item unless there is a possibility of a leak
or other axle repair is required.

You can tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1.

216

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless
start button until the vehicle starts.

Towing
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door
key to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 257).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.

All Vehicles
•
•

Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.

Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1.

Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Turn off your vehicle by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions. See
Ignition Switch (page 147).
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 257).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.

All-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground (by using
a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This causes damage to your
all-wheel drive system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.

Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.

217

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).

Driving Hints
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.

BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).

ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.

Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.

218

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Hints
•

•

Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
Close the windows for high-speed
driving.

•
•
•

Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Use a floor mat designed to fit the
footwell of your vehicle that does not
obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.

Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.

Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.

Secure the floor mat to both
retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with
the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.

Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.

Do not place additional floor mats
or any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This could result
in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

E266447

When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:

219

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driving Hints

E142666

To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.

220

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
•

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.

•

Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.

221

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.

Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance

HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.

To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.

The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.

Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

•

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance

•

Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.

FUEL SHUTOFF

Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
Press the button again to switch them
off.

WARNING

In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.

If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the fuel system checked.
Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.

Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.

Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.

222

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.

Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.

WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.

Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.

223

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.

WARNINGS
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.

Jump Starting
1.

Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper Cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.

E142664

Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.

224

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.

The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

3
E142665

1.
2.

Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.

E143886

225

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.

226

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED

Website

www.owner.ford.com

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.

These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.

Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.

In Canada:

A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.

Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8

Away From Home

Telephone

If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website

www.ford.ca

In the United States:

Twitter

Mailing address

@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)

Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126

Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:

Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)

Additional information and resources are
available online:

227

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.

Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.

In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:

In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.

Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126

228

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.

THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.

You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.

BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.

229

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA

For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.

The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:

CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:

230

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Customer Assistance

Customer Relationship Center

Phone

Fax

E-mail

Asia Pacific

N/A

apemcrc@ford.com

Caribbean and
Central America

+1 313 594 4857

expcac@ford.com

971 4 3327 266

menacac@ford.com

Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
Middle East

UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078

North Africa

N/A

nafcrc@ford.com

Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands

+1-800-841-3673

N/A

prcac@ford.com

Sub-Saharan Africa

+1-313-594-4857

N/A

ssacrc@ford.com

South Korea

+82-02-1600-6003

N/A

infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com

If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.

If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.

Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.

231

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
232

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Customer Assistance

Transport Canada Contact Information

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English)

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French)

Phone

1–800–333–0510

Ford of Canada Contact Information

Website

www.ford.ca

Phone

1–800–565-3673

233

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect the vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.

If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 257).

To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.

96
76

93 92 91 90 89

87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78

74
72 71 70 69 68 67

51 50 49 48 47 46 45

25
14
15

65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56

E173618

Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

1
2
3
4

Fan relay 2.

Fan relay 1.

Trailer brake control module.

40A
40A
30A

30A

Protected Components

Wipers.
Washer pump.

234

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

5
6
7
8
9

50A
20A

Protected Components

Anti-lock brake system pump.
Center console power point (without rear
park aid).

Power liftgate.

Moonroof.

Second row console power point.

30A
20A
20A

Relay

Third row power seats relay.

Relay

Heated rear window relay.

Relay

Trailer tow battery charge relay.

Relay

Starter motor relay.

Relay

Cooling fan number 2 relay.

Relay

Fuel pump relay.

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Not used.
1

110V AC power point.

Front blower motor relay.

Starter relay.

Storage bin power point.

30A

40A
30A
20A
20A

30A

30A
-

Instrument panel power point / cigar
lighter.
Third row seat module.
Driver power seat.
Memory module.
Trailer tow battery charge.
Not used.

235

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

26
27
28
29
30
31

40A

Rear window defroster.
Heated mirrors.

Cargo power point.

Front heated and cooled seats.

Front heated seats (without cooled seats).

Rear heated seats.

Electric fan relay 3.

20A

30A
20A
20A
25A

Protected Components

Relay

Auxiliary blower motor relay.

Relay

Cooling fan #1 relay.

Relay

Front blower motor relay.
Cooling fan (series) relay.

Relay

Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn lamps
relay.

Relay

Trailer tow reverse lamps relay.

Not used.

30A

Auxiliary blower motor.

Not used.

42
43
44
45
46
47

Passenger power seat.

Anti-lock brake system valves.

30A
20A

Relay

Rain sensor.

Canister vent solenoid (EcoBoost engines).

5A
5A

Windshield washer relay.

15A

Washer pump.

236

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

48
49
50
51

10A
-

10A

Not used.
Not used.

Relay

58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn lamps relay.
Not used.

30A
20A

Wiper relay.
Fuel injectors.
Fuel pump relay.
Left-hand high intensity discharge headlamp.

Alternator sensor.

Brake on/off switch.

Trailer tow back-up lamps.

10A
10A
10A
-

Not used.
2

A/C clutch relay.

Trailer tow stop/turn lamps.

Rear wipers.

10A
15A
15A

Relay

Heated mirrors.

Front park lamps.
Not used.

Protected Components

20A

Not used.

Powertrain control module – vehicle power
relay.
Vehicle power #2 – oxygen sensor heater.
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.

237

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

68
69
70

20A
20A

15A

Protected Components

Vehicle power #4 (ignition coils).
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control
module).
Vehicle power #3 (coil) – A/C clutch relay.
Fan control relay coils 1-3.
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.

Not used.

Relay

20A

Trailer tow park lamps relay.
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.

Not used.

82
83
84
85
86

Not used.
2

15A
-

Not used.

20A
5A

Rear washer.

Trailer tow park lamps.
Not used.

Powertrain control module.
Keep alive power and relay.
Powertrain control module relay.

238

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

Protected Components

Canister vent solenoid (non-EcoBoost
engines).
87
88
89
90
91
92
93

94
95
96

Run/start relay.

Relay
2

Anti–lock brake system module.

Powertrain control module run/start.

Adaptive cruise control module.

10A
10A
10A

Front blower relay coil.
Power steering module.

Auxiliary blower motor.
Rear window defroster relay power.
Battery charge relay.

30A
5A

Run/start relay.

Body control module run/start.
Front passenger window switch.

Not used.

Relay

A/C clutch relay.

Case Low Profile fuse.
fuse.

2 Mini

Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel. You
may need to remove a trim panel to access
it.

239

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses

E163102

Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

Protected Components

30A

Driver front power window.

15A

Memory seat.
Second row seats.

30A

Passenger side front window.

10A

Demand lamps battery saver relay.

20A

Audio amplifier
Active noise control module.

7.5A

Driver seat module logic.
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.

10A

Power liftgate.

Not used (spare).

240

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

Protected Components

10A

SYNC module.
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.

10A

Run accessory relay.
Front wiper motor relay.

10A

Intelligent access module logic.
Heads-up display.

15A

Puddle lamp.
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.

15A

Right-hand direction indicators.

15A

Left-hand direction indicators.

15A

Center high mounted stop lamp.
Backup lamp.

10A

Right low beam headlamp.

10A

Left low beam headlamp.

10A

Third row power seats.
Start button.
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Anti-theft system.

20A

Not used (spare).

20A

Locks.

10A

Extended power module.

20A

Horn relay.

15A

Steering wheel control module logic.
Instrument cluster.

15A

Steering wheel control module.
Datalink.

15A

Liftgate release.

Ignition switch.

241

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

Protected Components

Push button ignition switch.
27

20A

Intelligent access module power.

15A

Not used (spare).

20A

Radio.
Global positioning system module.

15A

Front park lamps.
Trailer tow relay for park lamps.
Front side markers.

Trailer tow brake controller.

15A

Smart window motors.
Master window and mirror switch.
Lock switch illumination.
Moonroof.
110V AC power point.
Interior rearview mirror.

10A

Not used (spare).

10A

Reverse park aid module.
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Interior mirror.

Climate control humidity sensor.
Heads-up display.

10A

Heated steering wheel.

10A

Refrigerator.

10A

Front passenger window switch.

15A

High beams.

10A

Rear park lamps.
License plate lamps.

7.5A

Not used (spare).

Extended power module.

10A

Not used (spare).

242

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Amp Rating

10A

Not used (spare).

10A

Climate control module.

15A

Fog lamp relay power.
Front direction indicators.

Protected Components

30A Circuit breaker Front passenger power window.
Rear power windows.

Relay

Delayed accessory relay.
Body control module.

CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.

243

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fuses
Fuse Types

E207206

Callout

Fuse Type

Micro 2

Micro 3

Maxi

Mini

M Case

J Case

J Case Low Profile

244

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Working with the Engine On

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.

To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1.

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.

If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.

Precautions
•
•
•

•

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.

E253246

Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.

Working with the Engine Off
1.

Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.

245

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
2

E202009

4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
E203009

Closing the Hood

3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.

Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC

246

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance

E253238

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).

Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 267).

Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 257).

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 256).

Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check
(page 254).

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 257).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 249).

Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 234).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 249).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

247

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance

E173375

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).

Automatic transmission dipstick.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid Check (page 254).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 249).

Washer fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 257).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 249).

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 256).

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 257).

Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 234).

Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 267).

248

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 308).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.

MIN

Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).

MAX

Adding Engine Oil

E146429

WARNING

ENGINE OIL CHECK

Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.

To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 245).
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 246).
Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See Under
Hood Overview (page 246).

E142732

249

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).

From the main menu scroll to:
Message

To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1.

Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 246).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Action and description

Settings

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Vehicle

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Oil Life

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
Reset
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.

Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.

Not Reset
Reset Cancelled

Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET

WARNINGS
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.

250

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not put coolant in the windshield
washer reservoir. If sprayed on the
windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.

Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 447).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.

Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 302).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.

Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to Ford
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.

Adding Coolant

If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.

WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal
injury.

To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1.

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

251

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.

Maintenance
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
302).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.

•
•

Brine.
Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.

Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.

Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.

Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.

Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:

Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.

1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.

252

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Coolant Change

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).

WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.

Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works

Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is running or
hot.

If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:

Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.

A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1.

When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.

Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.

3.
4.

When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.

253

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.

Maintenance
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.

If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:

Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)

WARNING
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the coolant temperature reduces.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.

3.
4.

At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK

You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.

Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives because they are
unnecessary and could lead to
transmission damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.

The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.

254

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.

Maintenance
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level

4. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.

WARNING
The dipstick and surrounding
components are hot. Use gloves
when moving components and
checking the transmission fluid level.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.

Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308).

Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).

Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A
low fluid level can damage the transmission.

Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.
High Fluid Level

E190273

Minimum.

Maximum.

If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point B) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.

Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1.

Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 247).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.

Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.
*

Adding Transmission Fluid
1.

Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction.
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.

255

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.

4. Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.

Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.

Vehicles With Turbocharged Engines
WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.

Do not start the engine with the air
filter removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty and can result in serious injury.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.

Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
Remove the air filter assembly securing
bolts.
Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
Rotate the air filter assembly slightly
in a counterclockwise direction.
Check the transmission fluid level.
Install the air filter assembly in reverse
order. Tighten the air filter assembly
securing bolts until you feel a strong
resistance.

256

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
E170684

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).

POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK

When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.

257

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
WARNINGS
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.

Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.

When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:

Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the
battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.

258

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
Shift into park (P).
Switch off all accessories.
Fully press the brake pedal and start
the vehicle.
Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 317). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 87).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 317).
Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press
the accelerator pedal to start the
engine.

Maintenance
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.

While the engine is running, press the
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.

Front Wiper Blades
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.

CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES

A
E165794

2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.

CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.

259

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Rear Window Wiper Blade

3. The wiper arm has a snap retention
feature to receive a cross pin from the
wiper blade structure. Grip tightly and
press on the arm/blade joint from
beneath and separate the blade from
the arm. Avoid rotating the wiper blade
structure and trapping your left hand
between the arm and blade.
4. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm
and press it into place.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.

E253247

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Grab the wiper arm with one hand
close to the arm/blade joint and pull it
as far away from the glass as possible.
Do not use excessive force because it
can break the wiper arm at the heel.
Hold it there until the next step.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.

Vertical Aim
Headlamp Aim Target

Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Grab the primary structure of the blade
with the other hand close to the
arm/blade joint.
E142592

8 ft (2.4 m).

Center height of lamp to ground.

25 ft (7.6 m).

Horizontal reference line.

Vertical Aim Adjustment
1.

Park your vehicle on a level surface
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away from
a vertical wall or screen.
2. Apply the parking brake.

E253248

260

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
3. Measure the height from the center of
the headlamp to the ground.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center of the
headlamp bulb.

To adjust the vertical aim, use a
suitable tool to rotate the adjuster
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern while
adjusting one headlamp, block the light
from the other headlamp.

4. Mark a horizontal reference line on the
vertical wall or screen that is a
minimum of 8 ft (2.4 m) long.
5. Switch the low beam headlamps on
and open the hood.

8. Close the hood and switch the low
beam headlamps off.

Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not adjustable on your
vehicle.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp
assembly, you must first remove the front
fascia and front bumper assemblies. We
recommend you see an authorized dealer.
E142465

6. There is a distinct change from light to
dark in the right-hand portion of the
headlamp beam pattern. Position the
top edge of this cut-off at the
horizontal reference line.

E220458

CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to do so could result in
serious personal injury.
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal
injury.

E220457

261

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Front Direction Indicator and Front
Parking Lamp

Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 265).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.

Headlamp

E220501

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

C
E220459

Headlamp low beam. Headlamp
high beam.

Front direction indicator. Front
parking lamp.

Front direction indicator.Front
parking lamp.

Headlamp Low Beam and
Headlamp High Beam
Note: If your vehicle has high-intensity
discharge headlamps, these lamps operate
at a high voltage. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.

262

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

3
E220460

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

E220461

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Use suitable tools, for example a
screwdriver and a socket wrench, to
remove the wheel arch liner fixings.
Carefully reposition the wheel arch liner
to access to the front fog lamp bulb
and electrical connector.
Note: To remove the lower push pin, use a
flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center
release pin.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.

263

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance

1
E174588

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

E220462

Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly. Gently pull the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Brake and Rear Lamps, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp

LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.

The following lamps are LED:
• Front side marker lamps.
• Side direction indicator.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Stop and tail lamp. (If equipped)

E220463

Rear side marker lamp.

Tail lamp.

Reversing lamp.

Brake and tail lamp.Rear
direction indicator.

264

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
License Plate Lamp

Remove the screws that secure the
lens to the lamp housing.
2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.

E220617

Exterior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

Front side marker lamps.

LED

Front direction indicator.
Front parking lamps.

3157NA

27/9

9008 H13

55/65

Headlamp low beam.
Headlamp high beam.
Front fog lamps.

H11

Side direction indicator.

LED

Rear side marker lamp.

194

Rear lamp.

194

3157K

27/3

LED

Brake and rear lamp.
Rear direction indicator.
Optional stop and rear lamp.

265

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

Central high mounted brake lamp.

LED

Reversing lamps.

921

C5WL

License plate lamp.

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

266

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter
the air induction system. Engine
components are susceptible to damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 447).
Incorrect component use can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page
303).

E200522

To replace the air filter element do the
following:

1.
2.
3.
4.

6.
7.

267

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
Install the air filter housing cover.
Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION

CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.

Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:

Name

Specification

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M5B194-B

Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P3-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)

WSS-M99P43-B

Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
•

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.

•

268

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.

Vehicle Care
•

•

Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
•

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.

•
•
•

Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.

Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.

Exterior Chrome Parts

Underbody

•

Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.

•

Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.

Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.

269

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.

WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•
•
•
•

•
•

Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.

CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.

270

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.

Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as
these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.

WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.

On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
crash.

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 272).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.

271

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.

6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1.
2.

You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.

Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.

272

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Vehicle Care
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.

Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.

We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.

Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.

CLEANING THE WHEELS (If
Equipped)

General

Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.

•

If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.

•

•
•

Body
•

•
•

Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.

•

273

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.

Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.

Vehicle Care
•
•

Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.

Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes

Engine
•

•

Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.

Tires
•

•

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.

Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.

Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.

Battery
•
•

Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.

274

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From Storage

Cooling system
•
•

Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous

Fuel system
•

Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.

Vehicle Care
•

•

Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.

BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of
your vehicle and the ground is less than
that of other models. Drive with extreme
care to avoid damage to your vehicle.

275

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners

GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.

WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles.
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity (utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 278).

In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver’s seating position.

Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination, if equipped.

E145298

276

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.

How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

E145299

•

277

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.

Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).

E168583

As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

278

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.

The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the

Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.

279

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.

280

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.

Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires

C D

G
H

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
281

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Letter
rating

Speed rating

81 mph (130 km/h)

87 mph (140 km/h)

99 mph (159 km/h)

106 mph (171 km/h)

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

124 mph (200 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

Speed rating

168 mph (270 km/h)

Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.

282

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Letter
rating

Wheels and Tires
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.

*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.

283

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.

The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.

Information on T Type Tires

T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.

D
E142544

LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
284

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.

Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.

E142545

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.

285

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.

WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.

Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
286

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.

is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:

Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.

Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).

287

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.

Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.

Tire Replacement
Requirements

You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.

Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number

Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.

288

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver's door. If this
information is not found on these
labels, then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
For a mounting pressure
more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum
pressure, a Ford dealer or other
tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass
tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.

WARNINGS
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
•

Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.

289

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards

If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.

No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.

Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.

Tire and Wheel Alignment

*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.

290

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.

Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page
447).

Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.

E142547

291

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S snow chains,
snow cables or equivalent on the front
axle for P235/60R17, P235/60R18, and
P235/55R19 equipped vehicles. The
use of snow chains, snow cables or
other traction assist devices that are
larger than SAE Class S may cause
damage to your vehicle’s wheel house,
suspension and/or body.
• Do not install tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices on the rear
tires. This could cause damage to the
vehicle’s wheel house or body.
• Do not use tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices with
255/45R20 tires.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying
that the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with
tire cables on your vehicle.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the cables. If this does
not work, remove the cables to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
cables on dry roads.

USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury,
and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also
strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.

292

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).

When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1.

293

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.

Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System

When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.

When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:

You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.

294

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

Low tire pressure
warning light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Solid warning light

Tire(s) under-inflated

Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Spare tire in use

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Flashing warning
light

It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.

When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.

295

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.

If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 293). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.

See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 293). If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:

296

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
•

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.

•

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.

When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
Tow a trailer.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
Use commercial car washing
equipment.
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.

Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent your vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel

To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake,
and block (in both directions) the wheel
that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of your vehicle) to the tire being
changed.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.

297

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Use commercial car washing
equipment.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Note: If the third row seat is stowed in the
floor, you will need to unstow it to access
the spare tire.

E211099

4. Remove the carpeted floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle, then
remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
6. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket by
turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the jack kit from the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack, L-shaped bolt, and
the wrench from the felt bag. Fold
down the wrench socket to use to
loosen the lug nuts and to operate the
jack.

Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.

E142551

3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.

298

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
8. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise,
but do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.

1
4

E145908

9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.

E75442

14.

15.

Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
300).
Install the wheel cover.

Stowing the flat tire

E201156

10.

11.
12.

13.

Put the jack in the jack notch next to
the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

E194296

299

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires
If you are stowing the flat tire, remove the
L-shaped bolt from the external pocket of
the felt bag. With the third row seat in the
raised position, stand the flat tire in the
rear of the vehicle with the tire’s valve stem
facing the rear of the vehicle. Fasten the
flat tire to the vehicle by inserting the
L-shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt
holes in the wheel. Turn it clockwise into
the threaded hole in the vehicle until the
tire is secured.

3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket
in the spare tire tub, using the locating
tabs to position the jack correctly.

If you are stowing the temporary spare tire,
place the tire over the jack and secure it
with the large wing nut.
Stowing the jack

E211100

Fully collapse the jack, fold the lug
wrench socket into the handle and
place the jack and wrench into the felt
bag. Place the extension bolt or
L-shaped bolt into the external pocket
of the felt bag. Position the jack as
shown to make sure that the locating
holes in the jack base can be placed on
the locating tabs of the jack mounting
bracket in the spare tire tub.
2. Securely close the wrench
compartment and the jack bag using
the Velcro™ straps.

E211101

4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With
the jack in place, place the looped end
of the retention bracket over the
threaded stud in the trunk floor and
secure it with the plastic wing nut.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

300

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Wheels and Tires

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting
surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt size

lb.ft (Nm) *

1/2 x 20

100 lb.ft (135 Nm)

*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

E145950

Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.

301

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Engine

3.5L V6

Cubic inches

214

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)

Compression ratio

10.8:1

Drivebelt Routing
3.5L Engine

E191904

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine

3.5L EcoBoost

Cubic inches

214

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

302

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Engine

3.5L EcoBoost

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.030–0.033 in (0.75–0.85 mm)

Compression ratio

10.0:1

Drivebelt Routing
3.5L EcoBoost Engine

E191904

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC
Component

Part Number

Air filter element

FA-1884

Oil filter

FL-500-S

Battery

BXT-65-650

Spark plugs

SP-520

Cabin air filter

FP-68

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2301 (driver side)

303

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Component

Part Number

WW-2103 (passenger side)
Rear window wiper blade

WW-1202

We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 447).

304

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Component

Part Number

Air filter element

FA-1884

Oil filter

FL-500-S

Battery

BXT-65-750

Spark plugs

SP-534

Cabin air filter

FP-68

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2301 (driver side)
WW-2103 (passenger side)

Rear window wiper blade

WW-1202

305

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.

E142477

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:

306

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

World manufacturer identifier

Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations

Make, vehicle line, series, body
type

Engine type

Check digit

Model year

Assembly plant

Production sequence number

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION

E167469
E167814

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.

The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.

Description

Code

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F55

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F50

307

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil

6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant

13.2 qt (12.5 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Automatic transmission fluid

10.9 qt (10.3 L)

Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)

2.43 pt (1.15 L)

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Windshield washer fluid

17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)
Fill as required

Fuel tank

18.6 gal (70.4 L)

A/C refrigerant

2.31 lb (1.05 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1

8.96 fl oz (265 ml)

Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

308

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12

WSS-M2C945-B1

Optional motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS

WSS-M2C945-B1

Optional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12

WSS-M2C945-B1

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Rear axle fluid (U.S.):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Canada):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L

309

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
WSL-M2C192-A
(Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-19-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

310

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
E142732

Materials
Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP

311

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

WSS-M2C947-B1

Capacities and Specifications

E240522

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.
Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil

6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant

13.7 qt (13 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Automatic transmission fluid

11.6 qt (11 L)

Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)

2.43 pt (1.15 L)

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Windshield washer fluid

17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)
Fill as required

Fuel tank

18.6 gal (70.4 L)

312

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

A/C refrigerant

2.45 lb (1.11 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1 Approximate

7.95 fl oz (235 ml)

dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Recommended motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Recommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-B1

Optional motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS

WSS-M2C946-B1

Optional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M2C946-B1

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

313

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

CXT-10-LV12
Rear axle fluid (U.S.):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Canada):
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
WSL-M2C192-A
(Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-19-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):

314

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

Materials
Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
WSS-M2C953-A1
XO-0W30-QSP

315

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Capacities and Specifications

E240523

316

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System
•
•

GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors

AM: 530-1710 kHz
FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz

Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.

AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
Radio Reception Factors

Distance and strength

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in
Ford CD players.

Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.

317

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure

extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.

Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.

In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA

Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.

318

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System

A B

O
N
L
J

M
K
D
I

E
F

G
H
E210707

RADIO: Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.

Function buttons: Select
different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (for example
Radio mode or CD mode).

CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press
the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen
options of Repeat or Shuffle.

Number block: In radio mode,
store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then
press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode,
select a track. In phone mode,
enter a phone number.

TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

319

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.

as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
G

OK and cursor arrows: Press
the up and down arrow buttons
to select the various settings.
When you make your selection,
press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set, or press MENU
to exit.

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

Clock: Press to access the clock
setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and
minutes. You can also set the
clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not
in phone mode, press to display
the clock.

MENU: Press to access different
audio system features. See
Menu Structure.

PHONE: Press to access the
phone features of the SYNC
system. See your SYNC
information.

AUX: Press to access or switch
between devices you plug into
your vehicle.

SIRIUS: Press to listen to
SIRIUS satellite radio.

Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.

SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press

Press OK to confirm a selection.

320

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System

Radio

Manual Tune

Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.

Scan

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

AST

Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands.

Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
RDS Text Display

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.

SIRIUS

Scan

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)

Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account.

Check Channel Guide

Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.

Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Alerts

Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.

Unlock All Stations

Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.

Skip No Stations

Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.

Parental Lockout

Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

321

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System

Audio Settings

Speed Compensated
Volume

Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7 or off, low, medium and high.

Sound

Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.

Occupancy Mode

Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.

Sound Mode

Choose between stereo and surround. Only with the
external sound systems.

CD Settings

Scan All

Select to scan all disc selections.

Scan Folder

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.

CD Compression

Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.

Set Date and Time

Select to set the time and calendar date.

24 Hour

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.

Clock Settings

Display Settings

Brightness

Select to change display brightness.

Language

Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.

Temp. Setting

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.

322

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD

Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.

WARNING

Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.

E210708

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

CD slot: Insert a CD.

TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

323

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System
D

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen controls most of
the audio features. See your SYNC
information.

E210709

324

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Audio System
A

SOURCE: Press to access
different audio modes, for
example AM, FM and CD.

USB PORT

Sound: Press to access settings
for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.

TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

WARNING

E205592

The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.

325

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION

E198355

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
*
• Use 911 Assist.

•

Use applications, such as Spotify, via
**
SYNC AppLink.

Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

•

Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.

•
•

•

Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).

These features are not available in all
markets and require activation.
**

Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.

Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.

326

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.

When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.

In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.

Privacy Information

Driving Restrictions

When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.

For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.

327

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.

Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.

Initiating a Voice Session
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 77).
E142599

When prompted you can say any of the following:
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

Bluetooth Audio

Stream audio from your phone.

Cancel

Cancel the requested action.

mobile (apps | applications)

Access mobile applications.

Phone

Make calls.

USB [1]

Access the device connected to your USB port.

328

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

Voice Settings | Voice
Preferences

Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.

Help

Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.

System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.

Adjusting the Interaction Level
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
E142599
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 77).

When prompted say the following:
Voice command

If you want the system to carry out the following

Voice Settings | Voice Preferences
Followed by either of the following:
Interaction Mode
Standard

Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.

Interaction Mode
Advanced

Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.

The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.

329

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
Voice command

correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.

If you want the system to carry out the following

Confirmation Prompts
Off

Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.

Confirmation Prompts
On

Clarify your voice command with a short question.

For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."

The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
Voice command

Media Candidate Lists
Off

If you want the system to carry out the following

Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.

Media Candidate Lists On Clarify your voice command for media candidates.
Phone Candidate Lists
Off

Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.

Phone Candidate Lists
On

Clarify your voice command for phone candidates.

330

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.

Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1,000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.

Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Message

Action and Description

NO PHONE

Press the OK button.

FIND SYNC

1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.

331

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones

Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.

Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).

Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

Action

PHONE SETNGS

Press the OK button.

BT DEVICES

Press the OK button.

ADD DEVICE

Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.

FIND SYNC

The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Voice Commands

Phone Voice Commands

Phonebook ___

Press the voice icon and say:

Phonebook ___ at Home

Voice Commands

Phonebook ___ at Work

Phone

Phonebook ___ in Office

You can then say any of the following
commands.

Phonebook ___ on Cell

Call History Incoming

___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".

Call History Missed
Call History Outgoing

332

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Voice Command

You can also say any of the following:

[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On

Voice Command

Call ___
Call ___ at Home

[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off

Call ___ at Work

[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer

Call ___ in Office

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1

Call ___ on Mobile

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2

Call ___ on Other

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3

Dial

[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off
Battery

None of these commands are available
until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Phone Name
Signal

___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".

Text Message Inbox
Send [New] Text Message

The following commands are only
available during active calls:

You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.

Voice Commands

Hold

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press MENU to go to the
PHONE menu.

Join

Phonebook Commands

Go To Privacy

When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.

Phone Menu Commands
To access the phone menu with voice
commands, press the voice button and
when prompted say:
Voice Command

[Phone] Menu
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections

333

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

Call ___

This command is not available until your cell phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Dial

Use to enter a phone number digit by digit.

When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
Dial

To confirm the number and initiate the call.

delete

To erase the last spoken digit. You can also press the left
arrow button.

clear

To erase all spoken digits. You can also press and hold the
left arrow button.

To end a call, press and hold the red phone button.

Receiving Calls

Phone Options during an Active
Call

When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.

During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.

Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Message

CALL MENU

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
PRIVACY

Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cell phone for a more private conversation.

CALL HOLD

Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.

JOIN CALLS

Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three callers
on a multiparty call or conference call.

334

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands
to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following
message appears.
JOIN CALLS

Press the OK button.

ENTER TONES Enter tones such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired
number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
PHONEBOOK

To access your phonebook contacts.
1.

Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.

CALL HISTORY To access your call history log.
1.

Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history
options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
RETURN

Exit the current menu.

Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features such as 911 Assist.

335

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™

Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

PHONE REDIAL

Press the OK button to redial the last number called.
Press the OK button again to confirm.

PHONE REDIAL

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC.
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
INCOMING
OUTGOING
MISSED
The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook
and call history each time your cell phone connects to SYNC (if the
auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
supports this feature).

PHONEBOOK

To browse your phonebook select:
BROWSE

Press OK. Scroll down or up to the
desired name and press OK.
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phonebook name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK. The phone
number that is stored under the
selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.

To search for a contact in your phone book select:
Press OK.
Scroll down until you see the first letter
of your phonebook entry. Press OK.
Scroll down until you see the second
letter of your desired phonebook entry.
Press OK.

336

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Repeat entering letters to narrow your
search. When you are satisfied with
your entry press the right arrow key on
the bezel.
SYNC will jump to the phonebook
contact name that matches your entry.
Press OK.
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phonebook name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK.
The phone number that is stored under
the selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
TEXT MESSAGE

Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
1

messages.
PHONE SETNGS

View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your message
notification, change phonebook entries and automatically download
your cell phone content among other features.

911 Assist

Automatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator following
a crash.

APPLICATIONS

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smartphone.

SYS SETTINGS

Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings and advanced menu listings.

EXIT MENU

Press the OK button to exit the phone menu.

This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only

2 This

SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.

Text Messaging
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.

337

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Receiving a Text Message

Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.

Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.

When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.
Following the notification you can do
any of the following:

Note: Forwarding a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.

Do nothing to have the message go into
your text message inbox.

To have SYNC read you the message using voice commands, press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Voice Command

Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message

Action and Description

SYNC will read the most recent text message to you.

To open the test message, press OK to
receive and open the text message. Press
OK again and SYNC reads your message
aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose
whether you’d like to reply or forward the
message.
Reply or forward the message, press OK and scroll to choose between:
Message

Action and Description

REPLY TO MSG

Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.

FORWARD MSG

Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose enter a
number.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.

Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.

338

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™

Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

TEXT MESSAGE

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
SEND MSG?

Allows you to send a new text message based on a predefined set of 15 messages.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Press the OK button.
Scroll to your desired message.
Press the OK button.
Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
DOWNLOAD MSG

Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.

DELETE ALL

Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.

RETURN

Press the OK button to exit the current menu.

Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.

339

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™

Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Message

PHONE
SETNGS

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
PHONE
STATUS

See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming
status of your connected cell phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done,
press OK again to return to the phone status menu.

SET RINGER

Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You can choose
one of the system ring tones or your cell phone ring tones.
Press the OK button and scroll to hear the available options. You can
also choose to use to use your phone's ring tone.
Press the OK button to select the desired ring tone. If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose
the phone ringer option.

MSG NTFY

You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a
text message arrives.
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
MSG NTFY ON
MSG NTFY OFF

MODIFY
PHONEBOOK

AUTODOWNLOAD

Modify the contents of your phone book (such as add, delete, download). Press OK to select and scroll between:
ADD
CONTACTS

Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell
phone. See your cell phone's manual on how to push
contacts.

DELETE
PHONEBOOK

Press OK to delete the current phone book and call
history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK
to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.

DOWNLOAD
PHONEBOOK

Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.

Automatically download your phone book each time your phone
connects to SYNC. Press OK to select.

340

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

AUTO ON?

When this message appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every
time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,
call history and text messages can only be accessed
when your specific phone is connected to SYNC.

SPEAK NAMES When enabled, SYNC speaks the contact name that is displayed on
the screen during phonebook browsing.
RETURN

Exit the current menu.

1 Downloading

times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto
Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download.
Bluetooth Devices

System Settings

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.

This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.

Press the Phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SYS SETTINGS

Press the OK button.

BT DEVICES

Press the OK button.

Select one of the following:
ADD DEVICE
CONNECT BT

SET PRIMARY?

BT ON/OFF

See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 331).

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones.
Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to
connect the phone.
4

Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.
Press OK to confirm.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.

341

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the
desired selection is chosen, press OK.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.
DEL DEVICE

Delete a paired cell phone.
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.

DELETE ALL

Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
Press OK to select.

RETURN

Exit the current menu.

1 This

is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2 You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
3 SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone
is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
4 Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth
features.
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
To access the advanced menu, press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu,
the scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SYS SETTINGS Press OK.
ADVANCED

Press OK.

Select one of the following:
PROMPTS

Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for
a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:

342

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between On and
Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
1.

LANGUAGES

DEFAULTS

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase
your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text
messages or paired devices.
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when the
following message appears in the display.

Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. Choose
between English, Français and Español. Once selected, all of the
radio displays and prompts are in the selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. If you
change the language setting, the display indicates that the system
is updating. When complete, SYNC returns you to the Advanced
menu.

RESTORE?
MASTER
RESET

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices, and return
the system to the factory default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete. SYNC returns
you to the Advanced menu.

SYNC REBOOT Press OK to select.
CONFIRM REBOOT?

Press OK to select. You only need to press
the OK button once. SYNC will be unresponsive for 2-4 minutes while it is
rebooting. Wait 2-4 minutes before
attempting to execute a SYNC command.

INSTALL APP

Install applications you have downloaded.
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button to
confirm.

SYSTEM INFO

Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.
Press the OK button to select.

RETURN

Exit the current menu.

343

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)

Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.

In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.

Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.

911 Assist (If Equipped)

Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 44). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.

Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.

See Roadside Emergencies (page 221).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.

344

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

911 Assist

Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.

Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.

Off

Off selections include:
Message

Action and Description

Off with reminder:

Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.

Off without reminder:

Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at
phone connection.
In the Event of a Crash

To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."

345

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.

Note: The AppLink feature is not available
if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord
Touch system.

911 Assist May Not Work If

Note: Depending on your display type, you
can access AppLink from the media menu,
the phone menu, or by using voice
commands. Once an app is running through
AppLink, you can control main features of
the app through voice commands and
steering wheel controls.

•

To Access Using the Phone Menu

•
•

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.

Press the phone button to access the
SYNC phone menu on-screen. You can
then scroll to:
Menu item

Mobile Apps Press OK to access a list
of available applications.
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
press OK to select a
particular app. Once an
app is running through
SYNC, you can access an
app’s menu by pressing the
MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.

Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, sticher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.

SYNC™ APPLINK™

For more information, please visit:

SYNC Mobile Apps

Website

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.

www.SYNCMyRide.com

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port in order to start the
application.

To Access Using the Media Menu
Press the AUX button on the center
console.

346

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™

Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Menu item

Action and description

SYNC-Media

Press the OK button.

Mobile Apps

Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.

Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, Stitcher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.

For more information, please visit:
Website

www.SYNCMyRide.com

To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

Mobile Apps

Action and description

Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, "Playlist Road Trip".

You can also say the following:
The name of an app
(such as Stitcher)
followed by "help".

To discover the available voice commands.

SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.

Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.

Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.

347

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 325).

E142599

Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

USB [1]

Action and Description

You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. See Media voice commands.

You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
USB[1]appears, you can say USB or USB one.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.

To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 325).
You can then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SELECT SRC

Press the OK button.

SYNC USB

Press the OK button.
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display.
Indexing…

When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. You can then
select one of the following:
PLAY ALL
ARTISTS
ALBUMS
GENRES
PLAYLISTS
TRACKS
EXPLORE USB
SIMILARMUSIC
RETURN

Exit the current menu.

348

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command

Whats This? | Whats
Playing?

Action and Description

The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
you what track is playing.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where text shows: (what's | what is) playing, you must say; "what's playing"
or "what is playing".
Voice command

Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command

Play Playlist ___

1,2

[Play] Previous Folder

USB [1]

[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song

You can then say any of the following

[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song

[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections

Repeat [On]
Repeat Off

Pause

Shuffle [On]

Play

Shuffle Off

Play All
Play Artist ___

1,2

Play Album ___

1,2

Play Genre ___

1,2

[Play] Next Folder

[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song

349

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

1,2

Search Album ___

1,2

Search Artist ___

1,2

SYNC™
Voice command

The system searches all
Search
Genre ___ the data from your
indexed music and, if
available, begins to play
the chosen type of music.
You can only play genres
of music which are present
in the GENRE metadata
tags that you have on your
digital media player.
Search
Track ___
| Search
Song ___

The system searches for a
specific artist/track/album
from the music indexed
through the USB port.

This allows you to make
Refine
album ___ your previous command
more specific. By using this
command you can filter
though a previous selection, such as an artist to
play only specific album.
Similar
Music

Voice command

Autoplay Off

1,2

Autoplay
[on]

Turn autoplay on to listen to
music processed during
indexing. Turn autoplay off to
allow the indexing process to
finish before the system plays
any of your music.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".

1,2

This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.
3

1,2

This voice command is only available in
folder mode.
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide
Press the voice button and say:
Voice command

The system compiles a
playlist and then plays similar
music to what is currently
playing from the USB port
using indexed metadata
information.

Bluetooth Audio
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connections | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song

Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.

350

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Press the AUX button, then the Menu

button to enter the Media Menu.

You can then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore
USB to view the supported digital music
files on your playing device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.

PLAY MENU

Select one of the following:
SELECT SRC

SYNC USB

Press the OK button to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also
plug in devices to charge them (if supported
by your device). Once connected, the
system indexes any readable media files.

SYNC BT

Press the OK button. This is a phonedependent feature that allows you to
stream music playing on your Bluetoothenabled phone. If supported by your device,
you can press seek to play the previous or
next track.

SYNC LINE IN

Press the OK button to select and play
music from your portable music player over

(If Equipped)
MEDIA SETTIN

your vehicle's speakers.

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings. Once you turn these selections on, they remain
on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
3

next track.
SHUFFLE

Press the OK button to shuffle available
media files in the current playlist. To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All
in the play menu and then select Shuffle.

REPEAT

Press the OK button to repeat any song.

351

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

AUTOPLAY

Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to
listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing
process to finish before the system plays
any of your music.

APPLICATIONS

Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.

SYS SETTINGS

Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.

EXIT MENU

Press OK to exit the media menu.

The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2

If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3

Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.
4

Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
Make sure that your device is plugged into
the USB port and is turned on.

Accessing Your Play Menu

Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.

This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
You can then scroll to select:
Message

PLAY MENU

Action and Description

Press the OK button.

If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are
media files, you have the following options:
PLAY ALL

Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.

352

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
ARTISTS

Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. If
there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists
them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.
1.

ALBUMS

Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
1.

Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
GENRES

Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.

PLAYLISTS

Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.

TRACKS

Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.

353

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

EXPLORE USB

Action and Description

Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.

SIMILARMUSIC

Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
*

to compile a playlist for you.

1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incomplete metadata information. Press the OK button.
RETURN

Exit the current menu.

With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.
Bluetooth Devices

System Settings

The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to enable, disable, add, connect and delete
a Bluetooth device.

System settings provide access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features.

Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.

You can then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SYS SETTINGS

Press the OK button.

BT DEVICES

Press the OK button.

You can then select one of the following:
ADD DEVICE

Pair more devices to the system.

354

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Message

Action and Description

Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
1.

Connect BT

Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to
connect the device.

BT ON/OFF

Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.

Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button.
DEL DEVICE

Delete a paired media device.
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.

DELETE ALL

Delete all previously paired devices.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.

RETURN

Exit the current menu.

This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**

Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.

Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.

355

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™

You can then scroll to:
Message

Action and Description

SYS SETTINGS

Press the OK button.

ADVANCED

Press the OK button.

You can then select one of the following:
PROMPTS

Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
1.

Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button. SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
LANGUAGES

Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
1.

Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
DEFAULTS

Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.

MASTER RESET

Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.

INSTALL APP

Download available software applications through the USB
port.

RETURN

Exit the current menu.

356

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.

Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The audio control settings
There is excessive background noise during a phone on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performcall.
ance.

Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.

During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.

The system says Phonebook This may be a limitation on
Downloaded but the
your phone's capability.
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.

Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated with the missing
contact.

357

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.
Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.

Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

358

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™

USB and media issues
Issue

I am having trouble
connecting my device.

Possible cause(s)

This may be a possible
device malfunction.

SYNC does not recognize
This is a device limitation.
my device when I turn on the
car.

Possible solution(s)

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an autoinstall program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.

Bluetooth audio does not
stream.

This is a phone-dependent Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC
feature.
The device is not connected. website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.

SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.

359

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.

SYNC™

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
what I am saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.

Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.

SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
the name of a song or artist. voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.

Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special characters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.

SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.

You may be using the wrong Review the Phone voice
voice commands.
commands at the beginning
You may be saying the
of the phone section.
name differently than the
way you saved it.

360

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.

Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recognize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

When I select "Find New
Apps," SYNC does not find
any applications.

An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.

Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, ensure your phone is
paired and connected to

361

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
My phone is connected, but AppLink-enabled apps are Ensure you have downI still cannot find any apps. not installed and running on loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
your mobile device.
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
My phone is connected, my Sometime apps do not
app(s) are running, but I still properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
cannot find any apps.
over ignition cycles, for
example.

362

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit" or "Quit"
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting "Apps."
then finding the particular
app and choosing "Force
stop." Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then
select "Find New Apps" on
SYNC.

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.

There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS. This bug may
cause apps that were found
the last time your phone
connected to SYNC not to
be found again if you have
not turned off bluetooth.

363

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

SYNC™
AppLink issues
Issue

My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.

Possible cause(s)

Unplug the USB cable from
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset. the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.

I have an Android phone. I
The bluetooth volume on
found and started my media the phone may be low.
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.

Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.

364

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Possible solution(s)

Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.

SYNC™ 3
Getting to Know Your System

GENERAL INFORMATION

The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.

WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.

E205444

365

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

Status Bar

This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.

Home

This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.

Clock

This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 415).

Outside
Temperature

This displays the current outside temperature.

Feature Bar

You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The Status Bar

The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.

Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.

Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).

366

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

E249671

Callout

Item

Description

Driver Temperature

This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.

Heated steering
wheel

When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.

(If equipped)
C

Passenger
Temperature

When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.

Microphone Mute

This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.

Mute

This icon displays when the audio system is muted.

367

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Callout

Item

Description

Download

This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.

Wi-Fi

This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.

Wi-Fi in Range

An available Wi-Fi network is within range.

Signal Strength

This icon displays the phone signal strength and the
roaming signal strength.

Text Message

This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.

911 Assist Off

This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.

In-Call

This icon displays when a phone call is active.

Bluetooth

This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.

Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item

Functions

Audio

Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.

Climate

Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.

Phone

Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.

368

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Feature Bar Item

Navigation
(If equipped)
Apps

Functions

Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or
electric this is also where your settings and
power information is located.

Settings

You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.

Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.

When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 379).

If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.

Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)

Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.

Using Voice Recognition

Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible the right
hand display (A).

Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).

369

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

E208626

You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
Option

Information

Entertain- Information for current audio playing.
ment
Select source.
Navigation

View current road and speed limit (if information is available).
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.

Phone

If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting:

370

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Option

Information

All calls

Incoming calls

Outgoing calls Missed calls

If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
1 Depending

on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.

SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.

Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).

PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.

Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.

M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).

VOL: Control the volume of audio output.

Using Your Bezel Controls

Mute: Mute the audio output.

Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:

See Steering Wheel (page 75).

371

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
•
•
•
•
•

•

Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 317).
DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 114).

WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

911 Assist

WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca

372

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."

Website

www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 415).

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.

373

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Safety Information

•

Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.

Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.

Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.

•

Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).

See the following table for more specific
examples.
Restricted features

Cellular Phone

Pairing a Bluetooth phone.
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.

System Functionality

Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.

374

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Restricted features

Wi-Fi

Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.

Text Messages

Viewing received text messages.

Navigation

Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Website

Creating a SYNC Owner Account

www.syncmaroute.ca

Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•
•
•

Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Maintain account permissions.

The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.

Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.

Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.

To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.

USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website

Please reference the website for any
further actions.

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca

375

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Updating Over Wi-Fi

If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:

To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.

Menu Item

Settings

To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:

General

Menu Item

Automatic
System
Updates

Settings
Wi-Fi
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks

You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.

From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.

When the system is connected via Wi-Fi
and automatic updates are enabled, your
system checks for software updates
periodically. If a new version is available, it
downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.

You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 415). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 430).

To switch this feature off:
Menu Item

Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates

376

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.

SYNC™ 3
Support

media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.

The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.

United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

Privacy Information

If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 415). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company do not access the system data
for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company.

When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported

HOME SCREEN

377

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

E209015

Item

Tile

Audio

Passenger
Heated and
Climate
Controlled
Seats

Phone

Home screen display

Shows the active media source.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains
the compass.
*

Displays the current setting of the passenger heated or
climate controlled seats.
This icon does not display if your vehicle has hard button
controls for heated and climate controlled seats.
If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, this option
displays under the audio information.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen.
The status of the phone features also appear. This includes
signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On
or Off), text messaging and roaming.

378

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Item

Tile

Driver
Heated and
Climate
Controlled
Seats

Navigation

Home screen display
*

Displays the current setting of the heated or climate
controlled driver seat.
This icon does not display if your vehicle has hard button
controls for heated and climate controlled seats.
If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, this option
displays under the audio information.
This map displays your current location or current route in
real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the next
turn and the length of time and distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains
the audio information.

If equipped.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.

You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.

To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
E142599
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.

Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.

The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.

Voice Command

There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and Description

Main Menu

Brings you to the main menu.

Go back

Returns you to the previous screen.

Cancel

Ends the voice session.

List of Commands

Gives you a list of possible voice commands.

___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands

379

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice Command

Action and Description

Navigation List of Commands
Next Page

You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Help

Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.

Audio Voice Commands

Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.

To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Sirius Channel ___

Description
1

You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".

You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___

Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".

FM ___
FM ___ HD ___

Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.

Bluetooth Audio

Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetoothconnected device.

USB

Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.

Play Genre ___

For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".

Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___

380

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command

Description

Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".

Browse ___

1 This

option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.

Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:
Voice command

Description

Set Temperature ___

Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).

Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Pair Phone

Description

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 415).

Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.

381

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command

Description

Call ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".

Call ___ at ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".

Dial ___

Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.

Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command

Description

<0-9>

If the full number was not entered with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.

Dial

Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.

Delete

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.

Clear

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.

Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command

Description

Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___

You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.

Reply to Message

382

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If

point of interest.

Equipped)

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations

Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a

You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Voice command

Description

Find an Address

Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.

Find a ___

State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".

Find a POI

Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.

Find an Intersection

Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.

Find the Nearest

State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.

Show Previous
Destinations

Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.

Show Favorites

Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.

Drive Home

Allows you to route to your home address.

Drive to Work

Allows you to route to your work address.

In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command

Description

Cancel Route

Cancels the current route.

Detour

Allows you to select an alternate route.

Repeat Instruction

Repeats the last guidance prompt.

Show Route

Displays the active route.

Route Summary

Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.

383

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command

Description

Where Am I

Provides current location.

Zoom in

Allows you to zoom in on the map.

Zoom out

Allows you to zoom out from the map.

Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command

Description

Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.

List Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.

Find Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.

There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Voice command

Description

Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.

384

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command

Show Traffic

Description

Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices

Displays a list of fuel prices.

Show 5 Day Forecast

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.

Help

Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command

Description

Voice Settings

Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode
Standard

Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.

Interaction Mode
Advanced

Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.

Call Confirmation On

Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.

Call Confirmation Off

The system does not confirm before placing a call.

Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.

You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.

385

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.

ENTERTAINMENT

E205443

Message

Message and description

Sources

Direct Tune

Presets

386

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Sources

You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.

Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.

Menu item

AM
FM
SIRIUS

USB

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.

Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
1 This

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.

feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:

AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station

Menu item

You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.

Action and description

Enter

Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.

Menu item

Cancel

Press to exit
without changing
the station.

A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.

Presets

To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:

Direct Tune

To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.

You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.

387

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.

SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

E234451

Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Menu item

Action and description

Browse

Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter

The system tunes to the station you select.

Cancel

You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.

You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.

388

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu item

Replay

Action and description

Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.

Live

ALERT

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 415).
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.

Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 415).

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.

Satellite radio signal
interference

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.

389

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Troubleshooting tips
Message

Acquiring Signal

Cause

Action

Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.

Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or
system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure

Invalid Channel

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.

The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.

Satellite acquiring
signal…

The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.

Questions? Call 1888-539-7474

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues.

None found. Check
channel guide.

All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.

SIRIUS Subscription
updated

SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

No action required.

HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)

To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 415).

Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.

390

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

Website

www.hdradio.com

Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:

E142616

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message

Presets

Action and description

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.

391

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issues

Cause

Action

Echo, stutter, skip or
This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.

The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio
normal behavior. Wait until the
broadcast is decoded. Once
audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

392

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.

SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
Issues

Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.

Cause

Action

The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
available in your current recep- location.
tion area.

1
Text information does Data service issue by the radio
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently
broadcaster.
playing audio.

There is no text
Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
1
information shown for broadcaster.
currently selected
frequency.
1

You can find the form here:

Website

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

CD (If equipped)

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.

Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.

The following buttons are also available:
Button

Function

Browse

You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.

393

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

Function

For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.

Bluetooth Stereo or USB

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button

Function

Repeat

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).

Shuffle

Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.

While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:

Button

Function

Browse

If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.

New Search

This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All

394

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

Function

Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump

This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.

Explore Device

If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.

USB Ports

Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 412).

Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
E211463

The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.

The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.

Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.

This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.

Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.

395

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.

CLIMATE

SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.

Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.

If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.

Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 415).

SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.

E208805

396

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
A

Driver temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the
temperature.

Heated steering wheel: Touch
the heated steering wheel icon
to switch the heated steering
wheel on and off (if equipped).

Defrost: A pop up appears on
the screen to display the defrost
options.
MAX Defrost: Touch the button
to maximize defrosting. Outside
air flows through the windshield
vents, the fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed and
the temperature dial returns to
the full heat position. You can
use this setting to defog or clear
a thin covering of ice from the
windshield. The heated rear
window also automatically turns
on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Touch to clear the
windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the
previous airflow selection. When
on, defrost provides outside air
to reduce window fogging and
distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and
demister vents.

AUTO: Touch the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Select the desired temperature
using the temperature control.
The system adjusts fan speed,
air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to
maintain the desired
temperature.

Power: Touch the button to
switch the system on and off.
Switching off the climate control
system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.

DUAL: This button lights up
when the passenger controls are
active. To switch the dual zone
operation off and link the
passenger temperature to the
driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button to switch it off.

Passenger temperature:
Touch up or down to adjust the
temperature.

Passenger heated and
climate controlled seats:
Touch the heated seat icon to
adjust the heated seat off and
on (if equipped).

Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when Defrost is
on.

Touch the climate-controlled
seat icon to adjust the
climate-controlled seat off and
on (if equipped).

Heated rear window: Turns the
heated rear window on and off.
See the Heated Windows and
Mirrors chapter in your owner
manual.

397

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Fan speed: Touch up or down
to increase or decrease the
volume of air circulated in your
vehicle.

Rear: A pop up appears on the
screen to display the rear control
options.

SYNC™ 3
A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency. A/C engages
automatically in MAX A/C,
defrost and footwell/defrost.

Touch the power icon to switch
the rear climate control
functions off and on.
Touch Rear Control to allow
the rear seat passengers to
adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch it again to prevent the rear
seat passengers from adjusting
the settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you
use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings.

Recirculated air: Touch to
switch the recirculated air on or
off which may reduce the
amount of time needed to cool
down the interior and help
reduce odors from reaching the
interior. Recirculated air also
engages automatically when you
select MAX A/C. You can engage
this manually in any airflow
mode except defrost. It may also
turn off in all airflow modes
except MAX A/C to reduce fog
potential.

If your vehicle has automatic
climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings
to the Auto settings of the driver.
Touch the up and down arrows
to adjust the temperature.
K

Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually or together to direct
the air flow to the desired area.

Panel: Distributes air through
the instrument panel vents.

Touch the heated seat icon to
adjust the heated seat off and
on (if equipped).

Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and
rear seat floor vents.
L

Touch the climate-controlled
seat icon to adjust the
climate-controlled seat off and
on (if equipped).

A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.
MAX A/C: Touch to cool your
vehicle with recirculated air.
Touch again for normal A/C
operation. MAX A/C distributes
air through instrument panel
vents and may help reduce odors
from entering your vehicle. MAX
A/C is more economical and
efficient than normal A/C mode.

398

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Driver heated and climate
controlled seats:

SYNC™ 3
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

PHONE
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
Then select:

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.

At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.

To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.

399

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.

Websites

www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:

Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.

Websites

owner.ford.com

E205447

Item

Menu Item

Recent Call
List

Action and Description

Displays your recent calls.
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.

400

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at
the top of the screen. You can choose:
All
B

Contacts

Incoming

Outgoing

Missed

All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical
order.
A-Z Jump

Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.

Phone
Settings

Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone
settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones
and alerts. See Settings (page 415).

Text
Messages

Displays all recent text messages.

Phone
Keypad

Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call

Do Not
Disturb

Press this button to begin a
call.

Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.
Calls are rejected if you do not have voicemail set up on your
phone. New text message notifications are not displayed on the
screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.

Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Note: Certain features are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is moving.

Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 379). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.

401

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

To accept the call, select:

To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Menu Item

Contacts

Menu Item

Action and Description

You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.

Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item

Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.

To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Recent Call
List

You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. The
system logs it as a missed call.

During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.

To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Menu Item

The phone status items are also visible:
•
•
•

Action and Description

Phone
Keypad

Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.

Call

The system begins the call.

You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:

Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.

Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.

402

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Signal Strength.
Battery.
911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 415).

SYNC™ 3
Item
Item

End Call

Privacy
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press and hold
the button on the
steering wheel.

Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.

Text Messaging

Keypad

Press this to access
the phone keypad.

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.

Mute

You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.

Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).

Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Hear It

Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View

View the text on the touchscreen.

Call

To call the sender.

You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.

To exit the screen.

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.

SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.

Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.

When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1.

403

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 325).

SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences

After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.

Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:

Disable

Menu Item

Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.

Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:

To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.

Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.

Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.

Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.

NAVIGATION (If Equipped)

Android Auto

Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.

Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.

Map Mode

Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.

Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.

2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See
USB Port (page 325).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on
your device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device. This may
require mobile data usage.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.

404

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.

E207751

Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.

E251780

Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.

E207752

Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.

E251779

Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.

E207753

You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:

E207750

Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).

If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.

North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207749

3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
E207748
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
415).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:

405

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button
Button

Start

Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item

Description

Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search

Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.

406

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Description

If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete
All
Home

Select this option to remove all previous destinations.

Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Work

Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Favorites

Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search

Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.

Save

Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.

The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food

407

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Description

Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All

Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.

Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City

Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Save

This saves the destination to your favorites.

Start

This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest

Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.

Shortest

Uses the shortest distance possible.

Economical Route

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.

The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel

On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.

Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Menu Item

Start

Action and Description

The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.

408

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.

Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button

Menu
You can then select:
Screen View

Full Map

A full screen map displays during navigation.

Highway
Exit Info

Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.

Turn List

Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.

Traffic List

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.

409

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Navigation
Settings

Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 415).

Where Am I?

Provides your current location city and the nearest road.

The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route

The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.

View Route

Press this to see a map of the full route.

Detour

An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.

Edit Waypoints

Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:

Optimize Order

To return to Go
your route
press:
1.

Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:

Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:

410

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Add Waypoint

The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.

You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press:

SYNC AppLink

cityseeker (If Equipped)

The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).

First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation

E225487

When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.

cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.

POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to update
points of interest (POI) on the navigation
system.

When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.

Send To Car

Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.

You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.

411

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.

The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.

For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Navigation Map Updates

Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-Fi

Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website

www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.

Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.

HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 412).

Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.

APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.

412

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.

Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.

Menu Item

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.

Find Mobile Apps

Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites

SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.

Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or
favorites.We recommend you do this at
home or outside of your vehicle.

The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.

Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.

Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.

413

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Action and Description

SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 415).

Equipped)

App Permissions

WARNING

The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.

When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.

Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.

Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.

Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.

Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.

Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.

414

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby

Action and Description

Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.

Weather

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map

Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.

Area

Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.

Ski Conditions

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.

Sound

SETTINGS

Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:

Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.

Sound Settings

Reset All

Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.

Treble

Adjusts the high frequency level.

Midrange

Adjusts the middle frequency level.

Bass

Adjusts the low frequency level.

Balance / Fade

Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.

415

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings

Speed
Compensated
Vol.

Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.

Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings

Stereo
Surround

Your vehicle might not have all of these features.

Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Menu Item

Podcast Speed

Action and Description

For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower

Normal

Faster

Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:

Cover Art Priority

Gracenote®
Management

Slower

Normal

Faster

Media Player

Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.

Gracenote®

The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.

Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist and album.

416

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Information

This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.

Update Media
Index

Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.

You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Clock Format

Select how time displays.

Auto Time Zone
Update

When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.

Reset Clock to
GPS Time

When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.

Bluetooth

The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.

Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:

Menu Item

Bluetooth

Action

On
Off

Phone

You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth enabled device.

Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.

The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.

417

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website

owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone

Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.

Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
Menu Item

Action and Description

View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth
Device

You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.

You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:

418

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Connect
Disconnect

Action and Description

Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.

Make Primary

Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.

Delete

Removes the selected device from the system.

Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Auto-Download
Contacts

Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.

Sort By:

Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name

Last Name

Re-download
Contacts

Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.

Delete Contacts

Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.

Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone

No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.

Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.

419

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Action and Description

Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert
(Silence)

No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.

You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout

When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.

You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Mute Audio in
Privacy

When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.

Roaming
Warning

When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.

Low Battery
Notification

When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:

911 Assist
Enabling 911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
Menu Item

911 Assist

Action and Description

Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can
switch this feature on and off by sliding the scrollbar as follows.
Setting Emergency Contacts

Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature
on.

Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.

You can set your contacts in the phone
book for emergency quick dialing.

From the settings screen select:

420

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

911 Assist

Action and Description

Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.

Set Emergency Select this option as it displays on the screen.
Contacts

Menu Item

Select a
Contact

Action and Description

Select this option under .

The screen lists contacts in the phone
book. Select the contact that you want to
set as emergency contact. You can set
Emergency Contact 2 by same process.
You can set two Emergency Contacts in
total.

Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.

Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.

This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:

Menu Item

FM HD Radio

Radio

Action and Description

Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.

AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Available)
Radio Text

This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.

Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.

421

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM

active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following
features:

This button is available if SiriusXM is the
Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Category for If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that
Seek
category.
Parental
Lockout

Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Edit Alerts

Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an
alert or delete all alerts.

Navigation

You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.

You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.

Map Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model

When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.

Breadcrumbs

When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.

POI Icons

Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon is displayed on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:

Incident Map
Icons

Select POIs

This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.

422

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Route Preferences
Menu Item

Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions

Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Always Use ___
Route

Fastest

Eco

Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.

Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically
Find Parking

The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.

Eco Time
Penalty

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
Guidance
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.

Navigation Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Navigation Preferences
Guidance
Prompts

You can adjust how the system provides prompts.

Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only

423

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection

The connected devices send data to Ford
Motor Company in the United States. The
encrypted information includes your VIN,
SYNC 3 module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.

The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.

Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.

Menu Item

Mobile Apps

Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any
additional charges you may receive from
your service provider, when your vehicle
sends or receives data through the
connected device.
Action and Description

Enable or disable the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
Disabling mobile apps in the
settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.

Off

You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile
Apps

This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed

Up-To-Date

The system has
No update is
detected a new app
required.
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is
required.

424

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Updating Mobile Apps…
The system is trying to receive
an update.

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:

Request Update

Request Update
All Apps

Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.

There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.

Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.

Note: Ford Motor Company is not
responsible or liable for any damages or loss
of privacy relating to usage of an app, or
dissemination of any vehicle data that you
approve Ford Motor Company to provide to
an app.

General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.

Menu Item

Language

Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.

Distance

Select to display units in
kilometers or miles.

Temperature

Select to display units in
Celsius or Fahrenheit.

Touch Screen Beep

Select to have the system
beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.

425

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Automatic System Updates

When you activate this
option, the system automatically updates when
you have an available
Internet connection
through a Wi-Fi network or
mobile connection.

About SYNC

Information pertaining to
the system and its software.

Software Licenses

Documentation of the
software license for the
system.

Master Reset

Select to restore factory
defaults. This erases all
personal settings and
personal data.
System Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi & Hotspot

You can access the following:

Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Wi-Fi

Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.

Available
Networks

This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.

Wi-Fi Available
Notifications

The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.

426

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)
Menu Item

You can access the following:
Action and Description

Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off

Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.

Settings

Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.

Data Usage

Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.

Manage Devices

Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.

Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.

Note: For your convenience data usage may
be available for monitoring under Settings
but may not reflect actual or current usage.
The vehicle network carrier is responsible
for providing information about your
account. Please contact the vehicle network
carrier for more information.

Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.

Note: Ford Motor Company may need to
update operating system software on your
vehicle, including security updates and bug
fixes, to keep connected services current,
like Vehicle Hotspot, without prior notice to
you.

Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.

Note: If you do not have an active vehicle
hotspot data plan, open your web browser
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.

Note: Data, such as the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID,
and data plan usage, is shared between
Ford Motor Company and the vehicle
network carrier to provide the Vehicle
Hotspot service in accordance with your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability, and may be used to enable
a seamless transition from an old to new
embedded modem and to confirm any
updates are successfully delivered.

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.

427

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Vehicle

Door Keypad Code

Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.

Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.

You can select the following features to
update their settings.

Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Action and Description

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Rear Camera
Delay

You can enable or disable this option using the slider.

You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.

Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Display Off

The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen
to switch it back on.

Brightness

Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.

Mode

You can select:
Auto

The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.

428

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Auto Dim

Action and Description

Day

The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.

Night

The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.

Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.

Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item

Advanced Mode

Enable this option to remove
additional voice prompts
and confirmations.

Phone Confirmation

Enable this option to have
the system confirm a
contacts name with you
before making a call.

Voice Command List

Enable this option to have
the system display a list of
available voice commands
when the voice button is
pressed.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.

Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.

For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333

When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.

To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.

429

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

refer to the tables below.

Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please

To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.

Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

There is background noise
during a phone
call.

The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.

Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.

During a call, I
can hear the
Possible cell phone
other person
malfunction.
but they cannot
hear me.

Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

During a call, I
cannot hear the
The system may need to
other person
be restarted.
and they cannot
hear me.

To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to download my phone- Possible cell phone
book.
malfunction.

Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

The system
says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.

Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.

430

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.

Possible cell phone
malfunction.

Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.

Possible cell phone
malfunction.

Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

iPhone

•
•
•

Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.

•
•

Go to your cell phone's Settings.
Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
Turn Show Notifications on.
Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.

Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.

431

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
This is a cell phone limitacell phone.
tion.

Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.

USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.

Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
Possible device malfunc- cable.
tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.

Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.

SYNC 3 does
not recognize
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my
temperatures.
vehicle.

432

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

This is a devicedependent feature.

Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.

Bluetooth audio The device is not
does not
connected.
stream.
The device is in a bad
state.

Try switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated.
information.
The file may be
corrupted.

Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.

SYNC 3 does
The song may have
not recognize
copyright protection that
music that is on does not allow it to play.
my device.
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.

Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 386).

The device needs to be
re-indexed.

Update media index. See Settings (page
415).

The device has a lock
screen enabled.

Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.

When I connect
my device, I
sometimes do
This is a device limitation.
not hear any
sound.

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.

433

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

To listen to Apple devices through USB,
select AirPlay from the devices Control
Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
The device or media
song informaplayer is incompatible.
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.

Connect a compatible device or media
player.

Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Failed connection.

Possible cause

Possible solution

Password error.

Verify password.

Weak signal.

Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.

Multiple Access points
within range with the
same SSID.

Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.

Weak signal probably
Disconnecting
after successful due to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or
connection.
high interference.

Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
with the front of the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interference.

Poor signal seen There may be an
by SYNC 3
obstruction between
despite being
SYNC 3 and the hotspot.
near a hotspot.

If the vehicle is equipped with heated
windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not facing the
hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.

434

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try
listed in the list as a hidden network.
again.
of available
networks.
SYNC 3 is not
SYNC 3 does not
seen when
currently provide a
searching for
hotspot.
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.

SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
hotspot.

Software down- Poor signal strength, too
far from the hotspot,
load takes too
hotspot is supporting
long.
multiple connections,
slow Internet connection
or other problems.

Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.

SYNC 3 seems
to connect with
a hotspot and
the signal
strength is
excellent but
the software is
not being
updated.

It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if
no new software. The
the hotspot requires a subscription, you
connected hotspot may may contact the service provider.
be a managed one and it
requires either a
subscription or agreeing
to the terms and conditions.

435

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You did not connect an
Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.

Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB cable.

My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.

AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.

Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
is running on your phone. Some apps
require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.

My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps.

Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
properly close and reopen their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
SYNC 3, over ignition
cycles, for example.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.

AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find Mobile
Apps," SYNC 3
does not find
any applications.

436

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.

There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions
of the Android operating
system that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle
drive to not be found
again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.

Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

My iPhone is
connected, my
app is running, I You may need to reset
the USB connection to
restarted the
SYNC 3.
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC 3.

Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.

I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC 3, but
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.

Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.

I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps
Menu.

Some Android devices
have a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that
apps can use to connect.
If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than
the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.

Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.

437

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

You may be using the
SYNC 3 does
wrong voice commands.
not understand
what I am
saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.

Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.

You may be using the
Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does
the name exactly as it
not understand appears on your device.
the name of a
song or artist.

SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call.

Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".

The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.

Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.

You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.

Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".

The contact name may
contain special characters.

Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.

438

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.

The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.

You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.

The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.

You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.

The system
generates voice
prompts and
SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt
ation of some
technology.
words may not
be accurate for
my language.

Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.

SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").

439

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

Personal Profiles
Issue

Possible cause and solution

Personal Profiles have not been set up.
An invalid profile name was entered.

I cannot create a profile.

A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.

I cannot link a keyfob.

A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.

My personalized settings do not save.

A different Personal Profile is active than
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.

My profile will not recall.

The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.

440

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue

Possible cause and solution

The keyfob being used is not linked to a
profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile
does not.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not.

I lost a keyfob.

I lost all profiles.

Personal Profiles is turned off.
The vehicle is in motion.
The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
a new keyfob to replace lost one.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.

441

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

SYNC™ 3

General
Issue

The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
language for the instru- current active language.
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
display.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").

SYNC 3 System Reset

The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.

442

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:

•
•

Lifestyle
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)

www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.

•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Exterior Style
Hood deflectors.
Side-window deflectors*.
Splash guards.
Spoiler.

Interior Style
Ambient lighting.
Door sill plates with logo.
Floor mats.

443

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Full vehicle covers*.
Locking fuel plug.
Remote start.
Roadside assistance kits*.
Vehicle security systems.
Wheel locks.

*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.

Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.

•
•
•

Ash cup or coin holder.
Camping tent*.
Cargo area protector.
Cargo net.
Cargo organization and management.
Conversation mirror.
Roof racks and carriers*.
Roof rails.
Seat covers*.
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Tablet cradle.

Peace of Mind

Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.

•
•
•
•

Illuminated door sill plate.
Rear seat entertainment*.

Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized dealer add any
non-Ford electrical accessories or
components to your vehicle, you may
adversely affect battery performance
and durability. In addition, you may also
adversely affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.

444

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.

Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)

Rental Car Reimbursement

Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!

1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits

Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.

One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.

Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:

Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components

•

There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.

•
•

•

PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.

Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.

Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.

445

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.

Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle

Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)

Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.

You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:

Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).

•
•
•

•

There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.

Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.

Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Protect extended
service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.

Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232

446

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.

Scheduled Maintenance
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION

Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.

We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.

Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.

It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).

Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.

Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.

Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).

447

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 250).

Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.

If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.

Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.

Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.

Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.

We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.

448

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Check Every Month

Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.

Check Every Six Months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.

449

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Multi-Point Inspection

Accessory drive belt(s)

Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance

Horn operation

Engine air filter

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses

Exhaust system

Suspension components for leaks or
damage

Exterior lamps operation
1

Fluid levels ; fill if necessary

Steering and linkage
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
2

pressure

For oil and fluid leaks

Windshield for cracks, chips or pits

Half-shaft dust boots

Washer spray and wiper operation

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.

Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.

The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.

NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.

450

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval

Vehicle Use and Example

Normal
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling

7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)

Severe
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation

5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)

Extreme

3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)

Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation

Normal Maintenance Intervals
1

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2

Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints all wheel drive only.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints.

451

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
1

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1

Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.

Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 250).

Other Maintenance Items

Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)

Replace cabin air filter.

Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)

Replace engine air filter.

At 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)

Change engine coolant.

Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).

Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt(s).

Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2

Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or
50,000 mi (80,000 km).
3

After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.

If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).

452

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.

SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to

Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

30,000 mi (48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

60,000 mi (96,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace cabin air filter.

30,000 mi (48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

60,000 mi (96,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.

Replace engine air filter.

Extended Hot and Cold climate operation

5,000 mi (8,000 km)
*

Change engine oil and filter.

Hot Climates only

453

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Operating in off-road (unpaved, sandy, dusty) and Mountainous conditions

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace cabin air filter.

5,000 mi (8,000 km)

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.

Replace engine air filter.

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.*
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
30,000 mi (48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 250).

Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)

Every oil change

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.

Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD
only) in your vehicle does not require any
normal scheduled maintenance. The PTU
lubricant will be more likely to require a
fluid change if the vehicle has extended
periods of extreme or severe duty cycle
driving. Changing or checking the PTU
lubricant is not necessary unless the unit
has been submerged in water or shows
signs of leakage. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.

Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).

454

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD

Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

455

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

456

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

457

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

458

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

459

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

460

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

461

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

462

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

463

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

464

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.

ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.

Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.

Do not fasten antenna cables to
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic
modules and airbags.
Car

E239120

465

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
Van

E239122

Truck

E239121

466

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices

Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak
MHz
RMS)

Antenna Positions

1-30

50-54

2, 3

68-88

2, 3

142-176

2, 3

380-512

2, 3

806-870

2, 3

Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.

END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT

Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.

•

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)

Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.

•

467

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.

Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

•

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•

You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•

Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR

•

468

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.

Appendices
•

•

SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional

•

469

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.

Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.

470

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
•

SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•

Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.

•

General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.

•

471

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.

Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.

Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL

472

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•

The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.

(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up

473

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.

may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•

(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator

•

474

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all

Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use

filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.

You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:

(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.

(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;

(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.

(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).

Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.

You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.

475

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
2. Account Information

distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that

You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.

I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,

3. Software License
•

ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or

Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.

iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•

3.1 License Limitations
•

(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)

476

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others

Appendices

•

is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•

5. Limitation of Liability
•

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

477

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit

Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.

conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.

7. Assignment

8.3

•

By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.

You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.

8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.

8. Miscellaneous
8.1

8.5

This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.

If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.

8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or

478

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
8.6

HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.

The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".

©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd

The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC

Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.

The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.

479

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.

Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.

Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.

Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.

Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such

Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

480

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606

Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.

If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:

Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

481

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”

B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.

3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:

b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.

The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,

482

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.

II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Territory Notice
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana
and
Martinique
Mexico

4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.

IV. Middle East Territory

483

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”

Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country

Notice

Jordan

“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.

V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.

B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic

484

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.

Austria
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine

France

Germany

“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”

Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”

C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country(ies) Notice

485

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Greece

“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”

Hungary

Italy

“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”

Norway

Portugal

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”

Appendices
Spain

“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”

Sweden

Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.”

Switzerland “Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.

AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR

VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).

486

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.

MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.

(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES

VII. China Territory

THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER

Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
487

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies

view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.

NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.

Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.

No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.

Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
488

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
Governing Law.

FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.

Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection

Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.

The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)

Entire Agreement

This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").

These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.

The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers

489

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.

including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,

490

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
Taiwan Territory

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.

Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.

Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
1. Acceptance

491

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:

5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.

Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.

3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.

7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.

492

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Appendices
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

493

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

494

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index

Disarming the Alarm...........................................74

Appendices....................................................465
Apps...................................................................412

A/C

...................................................................................412
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link....................414

See: Climate Control..........................................114

About This Manual...........................................7
ABS

At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............96

See: Brakes............................................................175

Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................96
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................96
Keyless Warning Alert........................................96
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................96

ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................176

Accessories....................................................443

Audio Control...................................................76

Exterior Style.......................................................443
Interior Style........................................................443
Lifestyle.................................................................443
Peace of Mind.....................................................443

MEDIA.......................................................................76
Seek, Next or Previous.........................................77

Audio System.................................................317
General Information...........................................317

Accessories

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................318

See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12

Menu Structure..................................................320

ACC

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..................................................323
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD...........................................................324
Autolamps........................................................83

See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............190

Active Park Assist..........................................181
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space.................................................................183
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........184
Troubleshooting the System..........................184
Using Active Park Assist...................................182

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................83

Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD....................115
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System........................116
Automatic Transmission...........................164

Adjusting the Headlamps........................260
Horizontal Aim Adjustment............................261
Vertical Aim.........................................................260

Adjusting the Pedals.....................................79
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................76
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................75

Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................167
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................166
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................167
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................164
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission............................164

End of Travel Position.........................................75

Airbag Disposal................................................51
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................114

Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................254

Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............267

Adding Transmission Fluid ............................255
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level...................................................................255

Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................74

All-Wheel Drive.............................................168
Ambient Lighting...........................................86
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................74

Autowipers.......................................................80
Auxiliary Power Points................................143

Arming the Alarm.................................................74

110 Volt AC Power Point...................................143

495

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................143
Locations...............................................................143

Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing....................................................162

AWD

Center Console..............................................145

See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................168

Console Refrigerator and Freezer.................145
Second Row Center Console.........................145

Changing a Bulb............................................261
Brake and Rear Lamps, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reversing Lamp.................264
Front Direction Indicator and Front Parking
Lamp.................................................................262
Front Fog Lamp..................................................263
Headlamp.............................................................262
Headlamp Low Beam and Headlamp High
Beam.................................................................262
LED Lamps...........................................................264
License Plate Lamp..........................................265

Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................257

Blind Spot Information System..............196
Switching the System Off and On................197
System Errors.......................................................197
System Limitations............................................197
Using the System...............................................196

BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........196

Body Styling Kits..........................................275
Bonnet Lock

Changing a Fuse...........................................243

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........245

Changing a Road Wheel...........................296

Booster Seats..................................................29

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................296
Tire Change Procedure....................................297

Fuses.......................................................................243

Types of Booster Seats......................................30

Brake Fluid Check........................................256
Brakes................................................................175

Changing the 12V Battery..........................257
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................267
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................259

General Information...........................................175

Breaking-In......................................................218
Bulb Specification Chart...........................265

Front Wiper Blades...........................................259
Rear Window Wiper Blade............................260

Checking MyKey System Status..............60
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................259
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................41
Child Restraint Positioning..........................31
Child Safety.......................................................18

Cabin Air Filter................................................122
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................308
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates.............................................................311
Specifications.....................................................309

General Information.............................................18

Child Safety Locks..........................................32
Left-Hand Side......................................................33
Right-Hand Side...................................................33

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................312

Cleaning Leather Seats..............................272
Cleaning Products.......................................268

Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................315
Specifications.......................................................313

Materials...............................................................268

Cleaning the Engine....................................270
Cleaning the Exterior..................................268

Capacities and Specifications................302
Cargo Nets.....................................................204
Car Wash

Cleaning the Headlamps................................269
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................269
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................269
Stripes or Graphics...........................................269
Underbody...........................................................269
Under Hood.........................................................269

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................268

Catalytic Converter.......................................161
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................162

496

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
Driving Through Water................................219
DRL

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................271
Cleaning the Interior.....................................271
Cleaning the Wheels...................................273
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................270
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................59
Climate............................................................396
Climate Control..............................................114
Climate Controlled Seats...........................137

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................84

E
Economical Driving......................................218
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............465
Emission Law.................................................160

Collision Warning System.........................201

Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........161
Tampering With a Noise Control
System..............................................................160

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................201

End User License Agreement..................467

Cooled Seats.........................................................137
Heated Seats........................................................137

Coolant Check

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................467

See: Engine Coolant Check...........................250

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......50
Creating a MyKey...........................................58

Engine Block Heater.....................................151

Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................58

Engine Coolant Check...............................250

Using the Engine Block Heater......................152
Adding Coolant....................................................251
Coolant Change..................................................253
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................254
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................253
Recycled Coolant...............................................252
Severe Climates..................................................252

Cross Traffic Alert.........................................198
False Alerts..........................................................200
Switching the System Off and On..............200
System Errors.....................................................200
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts..................................................................199
System Limitations..........................................200
Using the System...............................................198

Engine Emission Control...........................160
Engine Immobilizer

Cruise Control...................................................77

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................73

Principle of Operation......................................189

Engine Oil Check..........................................249

Cruise control

Adding Engine Oil..............................................249

Engine Oil Dipstick......................................249
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................302

See: Using Cruise Control................................189

Customer Assistance..................................227

Drivebelt Routing...............................................302

Data Recording..................................................9

Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................302

Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9

Entertainment..............................................386

Drivebelt Routing...............................................303

Daytime Running Lamps............................84
Direction Indicators.......................................85
Doors and Locks.............................................63
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45

AM/FM Radio......................................................387
Apps.......................................................................395
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................394
CD (If equipped)................................................393
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................390
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................388
Sources..................................................................387

Children and Airbags..........................................46
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................45

Driving Aids.....................................................196
Driving Hints...................................................218

497

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
Ford Protect...................................................445

Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................395
USB Ports.............................................................395

Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................446
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................445

Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks...........................213

Front Fog Lamps............................................85
Front Passenger Sensing System............46
Fuel and Refueling.......................................153
Fuel Consumption.......................................158

Before Towing a Trailer.....................................215
Hitches....................................................................214
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................216
Safety Chains.......................................................214
Trailer Brake Controller Connector...............214
Trailer Brakes........................................................214
Trailer Lamps........................................................215
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................213
When Towing a Trailer......................................215

Advertised Capacity..........................................158
Fuel Economy......................................................158

Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154
Fuel Quality.....................................................153
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................153

Fuel Shutoff...................................................222
Fuses................................................................234
Fuse Specification Chart..........................234

Event Data Recording

Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................239
Power Distribution Box....................................234

See: Data Recording..............................................9

Export Unique Options..................................13
Exterior Mirrors................................................88

Blind Spot Information System......................89
Direction Indicator Mirrors................................89
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................88
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................89
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................89
Memory Mirrors ....................................................89
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................88
Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................88
Puddle Lamps.......................................................89

Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........138

Gauges...............................................................92
Gearbox
See: Transmission..............................................164

General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................52
Intelligent Access.................................................52

General Maintenance Information........447
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................449
Owner Checks and Services.........................448
Protecting Your Investment...........................447
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?..........................447
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................447

Fastening the Seatbelts...............................35
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.....................................37
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................36
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................35

Flat Tire
Floor Mats........................................................219
Fog Lamps - Front

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................230
Getting the Services You Need...............227

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................85

Away From Home..............................................227

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296

Foot Pedals

See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................79

Ford Credit..........................................................11

Handbrake

US Only......................................................................11

See: Parking Brake..............................................176

Hazard Flashers............................................222

498

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
Headlamp Adjusting

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System...................................................108
Brake System.......................................................108
Collision Warning System...............................109
Doors and Locks.................................................109
Fuel..........................................................................109
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................110
Maintenance.........................................................110
MyKey........................................................................111
Park Aid.....................................................................111
Power Steering......................................................112
Seats.........................................................................112
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................112
Towing......................................................................113
Traction Control....................................................113
Transmission.........................................................113

See: Adjusting the Headlamps....................260

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................84
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp...........................261

Headrest
See: Head Restraints.........................................123

Head Restraints.............................................123
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................124
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................125

Heated Seats.................................................136
Front Seats............................................................136
Second Row Heated Seats.............................136

Heated Steering Wheel................................77
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................121
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................121
Heated Rear Window.........................................121

Installing Child Restraints............................19

Heating

Child Seats...............................................................19
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................25
Using Tether Straps.............................................27

See: Climate Control..........................................114

Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................118
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................120
General Hints........................................................118
Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................119
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................119
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........120
Recommended Settings for Heating...........119

Instrument Cluster.........................................92
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................84
Instrument Panel Overview........................16
Interior Lamps.................................................85
Second Row Reading Lamps..........................85
Third Row Dome Lamps...................................86

Interior Mirror...................................................90

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................176
Home Screen.................................................377
Hood Lock

Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................90

Introduction.........................................................7

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........245

Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................223
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................223
Jump Starting......................................................224
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................223
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................224

Ignition Switch...............................................147
In California (U.S. Only).............................228
Information Display Control........................77
Information Displays.....................................97

General Information............................................97

Information Messages................................105

Keyless Entry...................................................66

Adaptive Cruise Control..................................106
AdvanceTrac™....................................................106
Alarm......................................................................106
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................106
AWD.........................................................................107
Battery and Charging System........................107

SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad................................................................66

Keyless Starting.............................................147
Ignition Modes.....................................................148

Keys and Remote Controls.........................52

499

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index

Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................126
Recline Adjustment...........................................126

Liftgate...............................................................69
Lighting Control..............................................82

Memory Function.........................................128
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................129
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
..............................................................................129
Saving a PreSet Position.................................128

Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............83
Headlamp High Beam........................................82

Lighting..............................................................82
General Information............................................82

Load Carriers

Message Center

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............204

See: Information Displays.................................97

Load Carrying................................................204
Load Limit......................................................204

Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................121
See: Windows and Mirrors................................87

Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................209
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................204

Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................90
Bounce-Back..........................................................91
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...............91
Venting the Moonroof.........................................91

Locking and Unlocking.................................63
Activating Intelligent Access...........................64
Autolock..................................................................65
Autounlock ............................................................65
Battery Saver.........................................................66
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock.................65
Illuminated Entry..................................................66
Illuminated Exit.....................................................66
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade............................................................63
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside..........64
Power Door Locks................................................63
Remote Control....................................................63
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................64
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................65

Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............303
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................305
MyKey Troubleshooting................................61
MyKey™.............................................................57
Principle of Operation.........................................57

N
Navigation.....................................................404
cityseeker................................................................411
Destination Mode.............................................406
Map Mode............................................................404
Navigation Map Updates.................................412
Navigation Menu...............................................409
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link....................412
SYNC AppLink......................................................411
Waypoints.............................................................410

Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........450
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................450
Normal Maintenance Intervals......................451

Maintenance..................................................245
General Information.........................................245

Manual Climate Control..............................114
Manual Liftgate..............................................69

Oil Change Indicator Reset......................250
Oil Check

Closing the Liftgate.............................................69
Opening the Liftgate...........................................69

See: Engine Oil Check......................................249

Manual Seats.................................................126

Opening and Closing the Hood..............245

Lumbar Adjustment..........................................126

Closing the Hood...............................................246

500

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index

Opening the Hood.............................................245

Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................232
Overhead Console.......................................146

Rear Parking Aid...........................................180
Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........120
Rear Seats.......................................................129

Rear View Camera.......................................185

Parking Aids...................................................180

Rear View Camera

Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........232

Adjusting the Rear Seats.................................129
Using the Rear View Camera System.........186

Principle of Operation......................................180

See: Rear View Camera....................................185

Parking Brake..................................................176
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................73

Rear Window Wiper and Washers............81
Rear Camera Washer...........................................81
Rear Window Washer..........................................81
Rear Window Wiper Blade................................81

SecuriLock®...........................................................73

PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................73

Recommended Towing Weights..............211
Refueling..........................................................156

Pedals.................................................................79
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................43

Refueling System Overview...........................156
Refueling System Warning.............................158
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................156

How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................43

Remote Control..............................................53

Phone..............................................................399

Car Finder................................................................55
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53
Intelligent Access Key.........................................53
Memory Feature...................................................56
Remote Start.........................................................55
Replacing the Battery.........................................54
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................55

During a Phone Call..........................................402
Making Calls.........................................................401
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time..................................................................399
Phone Menu.......................................................400
Receiving Calls...................................................402
Smartphone Connectivity.............................403
Text Messaging..................................................403

Remote Start..................................................122
Automatic Settings............................................122

Post-Crash Alert System..........................225
Power Door Locks

Removing a Headlamp...............................261
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............273
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................63

Power Liftgate.................................................70
Obstacle Detection...............................................71
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................70
Stopping the Liftgate Movement....................71

Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12

Power Seats....................................................126
Power Lumbar.....................................................128

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................56
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................232
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................232
Roadside Assistance...................................221

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................257
Power Windows..............................................87
Accessory Delay....................................................87
Bounce-Back.........................................................87
One-Touch Down.................................................87
One-Touch Up.......................................................87
Window Lock.........................................................87

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................222
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................222

Protecting the Environment........................15
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296

501

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
Voice Control.......................................................429
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................426

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................222
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................221

Side Airbags.....................................................48
Sitting in the Correct Position..................123
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................292

Spare Wheel

Roadside Emergencies...............................221
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................204
Running-In

See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296

Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12

See: Breaking-In..................................................218

Running Out of Fuel....................................154
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................155
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................154

Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................453

Exceptions............................................................454

Speed Control

Safety Canopy™............................................49
Safety Precautions.......................................153
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........455
Scheduled Maintenance...........................447
Seatbelt Extension.........................................41
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................38
Seatbelt Reminder........................................39

See: Cruise Control............................................189

Stability Control............................................178
Principle of Operation.......................................178

Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................147

Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................148
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................150
Failure to Start.....................................................150
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................151
Important Ventilating Information................151
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................151
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................150
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................148
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................149

Belt-Minder™........................................................39

Seatbelts...........................................................34
Principle of Operation........................................34

Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................39
Conditions of operation.....................................39

Seats..................................................................123
Security...............................................................73
Settings............................................................415

Starting and Stopping the Engine..........147

911 Assist...............................................................420
Ambient Lighting................................................427
Bluetooth...............................................................417
Clock........................................................................417
Display...................................................................428
General..................................................................425
Media Player.........................................................416
Mobile Apps.........................................................424
Navigation.............................................................422
Phone......................................................................417
Radio.......................................................................421
SiriusXM................................................................422
Sound......................................................................415
Valet Mode...........................................................429
Vehicle...................................................................428

General Information...........................................147

Steering............................................................201
Electric Power Steering....................................201

Steering Wheel................................................75
Storage Compartments.............................145
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................90

Sun Visors.........................................................90
Illuminated Vanity Mirror..................................90

Supplementary Restraints System.........44
Principle of Operation........................................44

Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................365
General Information.........................................365

502

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index

SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................430
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................344

Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................246
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................247
Universal Garage Door Opener...............138

911 Assist...............................................................344

SYNC™ AppLink™.....................................346
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................346

SYNC™............................................................326
General Information.........................................326

HomeLink Wireless Control System...........138

SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................357

USB Port..........................................................325
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................190

Automatic Cancellation...................................193
Blocked Sensor...................................................194
Canceling the Set Speed.................................193
Changing the Set Speed..................................193
Detection Issues..................................................193
Following a Vehicle.............................................191
Hilly Condition Usage........................................193
Overriding the Set Speed................................192
Resuming the Set Speed.................................193
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............191
Setting the Gap Distance................................192
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................193
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................190
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............195
System Not Available.......................................194

Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............302

The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................229
Tire Care..........................................................278
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................280
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................278
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................281
Temperature A B C............................................279
Traction AA A B C...............................................279
Treadwear.............................................................279

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........293
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................294
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................294

Using All-Wheel Drive................................168
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................170
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires....................................................................169
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires....................................................................169

Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................276

Towing a Trailer.............................................210
Load Placement.................................................210

Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................216

Using Cruise Control...................................189
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................189
Switching Cruise Control On..........................189

Emergency Towing.............................................216
Recreational Towing..........................................216

Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................61
Using Snow Chains.....................................292
Using Stability Control................................179
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................347

Towing..............................................................210
Traction Control.............................................177
Principle of Operation........................................177

Trailer Sway Control......................................211
Transmission Code Designation............307
Transmission..................................................164
Transporting the Vehicle...........................225

Accessing Your Play Menu..............................352
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................347
Media Menu Features......................................350
Media Voice Commands................................349

503

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
Fuel system..........................................................274
General...................................................................273
Miscellaneous......................................................274
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................274
Tires.........................................................................274

System Settings.................................................354
What's Playing?.................................................349

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............331
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu..................................................................335
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................339
Making a Call.......................................................334
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................331
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................332
Phone Options during an Active Call.........334
Phone Voice Commands................................332
Receiving Calls....................................................334
System Settings..................................................341
Text Messaging...................................................337

Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................114

VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...........306

Voice Control....................................................77

W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................93
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................93
Airbag Readiness.................................................94
Anti-Lock Braking System................................94
Battery......................................................................94
Brake System.........................................................94
Charging System..................................................94
Cruise Control........................................................94
Directional Indicator...........................................94
Door Ajar.................................................................94
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................94
Engine Oil................................................................95
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp.....................95
Front Airbag...........................................................95
Front Fog Lamps..................................................95
Head Up Display...................................................95
High Beam..............................................................95
Liftgate Ajar............................................................95
Low Fuel Level.......................................................95
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................95
Low Washer Fluid.................................................95
Parking Lamps......................................................95
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power..................................................................96
Service Engine Soon...........................................96
Stability Control...................................................96
Stability Control Off............................................96

Using Traction Control.................................177
Switching the System Off................................177
System Indicator Lights and
Messages...........................................................177
Using a Switch......................................................177
Using the Information Display
Controls..............................................................177

Using Voice Recognition...........................328
Audio Voice Commands.................................380
Climate Voice Commands..............................381
Initiating a Voice Session................................328
Mobile App Voice Commands......................384
Navigation Voice Commands.......................383
Phone Voice Commands.................................381
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................384
System Interaction and Feedback..............329
Voice Settings Commands............................385

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................230

V
Vehicle Care...................................................268
General Information.........................................268

Vehicle Certification Label.......................307
Vehicle Identification Number...............306
Vehicle Storage.............................................273

Washer Fluid Check.....................................257
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
See: Wipers and Washers.................................80

Battery....................................................................274
Body........................................................................273
Brakes.....................................................................274
Cooling system....................................................274
Engine.....................................................................274

Waxing.............................................................270
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................296

504

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Index
Wheels and Tires.........................................276
General Information..........................................276
Technical Specifications................................300

Windows and Mirrors....................................87
Windshield Washers......................................81
Windshield Wipers........................................80
Speed Dependent Wipers................................80

Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................259

Wipers and Washers....................................80

505

Flex (TP3) , enUSA, Edition date: 201801, Second Printing

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Unknown
Create Date                     : 2018:01:05 20:15:05Z
Modify Date                     : 2018:06:07 10:17:22-05:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Untitled
Creator                         : Unknown
Producer                        : XEP 4.16 build 20090723
Trapped                         : False
Creator Tool                    : Unknown
Metadata Date                   : 2018:06:07 10:17:22-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:04f29365-8a6d-4226-9e05-904efb1d3a0e
Instance ID                     : uuid:c753bbda-939f-4aa3-983f-9e5e17795148
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 508

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools